Home

Juniper 1-Port Serial Mini-PIM

1. g034104 Figure 2 on page 6 shows how the slots on the front panel of the SRX650 Services Gateway are numbered Slots 1 through 8 are for GPIMs Figure 2 SRX650 Services Gateway Slot Numbers Q 8 8 O JUNIPELr SRX650 0 e00 8 Sl 2 o o a D NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Because the services gateway GPIMs communicate with the backplane at various performance levels you must install them in the correct slots Figure 3 on page 7 Figure 4 on page 7 and Figure 5 on page 7 show the three form factors for the services gateway GPIMs 6 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Figure 3 Example of a Standard GPIM Installs in One Standard Slot Too DUAL T1 E1 T 4 i k GPIM STATUSO i iiit SHEUN o L RTD CRD g032721 Figure 4 Example of a Double High Single Wide XPIM 16Gig DH 2p 4 Yp Gm WM Bp YH XPIM ory oo oor oor A o oo oor joo eA bar e A Cae Cal SF TINT TO ToT Tonn TOT f M lb Aa Al BE E ISS Oa O E NA___LNKIACT INE 9032723
2. U e ER J Pals ES me Figure 36 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE GEE Oy Wm Wm Op Wm Wm Wy Wa an in on Ga xn e ee iatfnimln J Pa Saxo Related 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 DocuUmMEnANON 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the following key features 24 triple speed 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports double high and double wide card 4 ports that can be configured to use SFPs PoE support for all ports PCI Express interface for control and management e I2C interface for module monitor and identification Maximum module power of 40 0 W without PoE JTAG support for boundary scan test 140 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on p
3. LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 15 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 60 3 59 Receive Data A B 4 38 Request to Send A 48 5 47 Clear to Send A 33 6 Data Set Ready A 57 7 Signal Ground 18 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 51 9 52 Receive Clock B 14 10 13 Received Line Signal Detector B 6 1 5 Terminal Timing B 55 12 56 Transmit Clock B 47 13 48 Clear to Send B 2 14 1 Transmit Data B 56 15 55 Transmit Clock A 59 16 60 Receive Data B 52 17 51 Receive Clock A 45 18 Local Loopback 38 19 37 Request to Send B 9 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 23 Signal Ground 5 24 6 Terminal Timing A 26 to 25 z Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 173 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 74 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 30 to 29 2 Related gt EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 e RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Se
4. l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Interface Cables Table 29 on page 70 lists the cables that you can order from Juniper Networks to connect to a port on the synchronous 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 69 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide The device to which you are connecting and the serial interface types determine which type of cable you need Table 29 Juniper Networks Serial Cables Connector Product Number Interface Type Type JX CBL EIA530 DCE EIA530 cable DCE 3 04m 10 ft Female JX CBL EIA530 DTE EIA530 cable DTE 3 04 m 10 ft Male JX CBL RS232 DCE RS232 cable DCE 3 04 m 10 ft Female JX CBL RS232 DTE RS232 cable DTE 3 04 m 10 ft Male JX CBL RS449 DCE RS449 cable DCE 3 04 m 10 ft Female JX CBL RS449 DTE RS449 cable DTE 3 04 m 10 ft Male JX CBL V35 DCE V 35 cable DCE 3 04 m 10 ft Female JX CBL V35 DTE V 35 cable DTE 3 04 m 10 ft Male JX CBL X21 DCE X 21 cable DCE 3 04 m 10 ft Female JX CBL X21 DTE X 21 cable DTE 3 04 m 10 ft Male Related l Port Seria Documentation ini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module
5. Using the J Web Interface on page 154 e Using the CLI to Configure the CT Interface on page 155 e Using the CLI to Configure the CE Interface on page 155 Using the J Web Interface 154 To perform basic configuration for the Dual CT1 E1 GPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway Verify whether the interface has been configured by reviewing the information in the Configured column yes no Select the name of the parent interface you want to edit o NOTE You must configure the parent CT1 or CE interface before you configure the child T1 or El interface respectively From the CT1 CE1 Interfaces General Configuration page for the parent CT1 or CEI interface select no for the Partitioning field Click OK to save changes Select the name of the child interface T1 or E1 you want to edit To use the port on the GPIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d
6. e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 4 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS 1 Port DOCS 1 Port DOCS Port DOCS S Mini Physical Interface Modu Mini Physical Interface Modu Mini Physical Interface Modu Specifications on page 43 S S S Mini Physical Interface Modu S S Mini Physical Interface Modu S Mini Physical Interface Modu S Mini Physical Interface Modu e Overview on page 41 e Key Features on page 42 e Supported Standards on page 43 e Network Interface e Hardware Specifications on page 44 e LEDs on page 45 e Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview The Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM includes the following features Provides a single cable modem interface for connecting to a cable modem termination system CMTS network Supports high speed bidirectional data transfer over an existing cable TV system Provides high speed WAN connectivity The DOCSIS 3 0 US model of the 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM is supported Figure 16 on page 41 shows the 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM front panel Figure 16 DOCSIS Mini PIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 4l SRX Series Services
7. EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 213 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 214 Table 94 on page 214 gives the EIA 530 DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 94 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM
8. EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module 186 Table 83 on page 186 gives the X 21 DTE cable pinouts Table 83 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 48 3 47 Control A 1 4 2 Receive A 37 5 38 Indicate A 5 6 6 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Servi
9. Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 123 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 51 8 Port Serial GPIM Components Component Location Description ONLINE OFFLINE button Right side of the GPIM To gracefully shut down the GPIM if the Services and Only SRX650 Services Routing Engine is on press Gateway supports down and hold the button for hot swappable functionality 4 to 5 seconds and then for GPIMs release The GPIM gracefully shuts down and turns off the power supply units PSUs To power up the GPIM if the Services and Routing Engine is off press and hold the ONLINE OFFLINE button for 4 to 5 seconds and then release Connector Middle or right side of the GPIM Two dual stacked 136 pin VHDCI connectors Custom cables are used to connect the VHDCI connectors to the data terminal equipment DTE or the data circuit terminating equipment DCE Captive screws One on each side of the GPIM Use the captive screws to hold the GPIM in place e 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122 e 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Por
10. 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 120 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GPIM 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications Table 49 on page 121 lists the network interface specifications of the 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 49 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications Description Line encoding Specification NRZ and NRZ Line Protocols EIA 530 EIA 530A e EIA 449 e RS 232 e V35 e X21 Modes e Data terminal equipment DTE e Clear to send CTS e Data carrier detect DCD Dataset ready DSR Data circuit terminating equipment DCE e Request to send RTS e Data terminal ready DTR Synchronous Tx Rx rate port Up to 8 Mbps Error counters rx_error_counts tx_abort_counts rx_giant_counts rx_runt_counts and crc_err_counts HDLC Features Mode 56K or 64K PPP Frame Relay and Cisco HDLC Supported encapsulation Shared flag Supported Idle flag fill Ox7e or all ones Supported Counters Runts giants fcs error abort error and align error Related 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 Documentation 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 Copyright
11. 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 39 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Using the CLI 40 Related Documentation To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the serial interface is installed on the device show chassis hardware e Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address set interfaces at 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces at 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options set security zones security zone trust interfaces at 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all See the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide for more details e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 33 e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 35 e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 37
12. Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics 38 Related Documentation The 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the following Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM loopback diagnostics OAM F4 far loopback test OAM F4 near loopback test OAM F5 far loopback test OAM F5 near loopback test Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 35 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 3 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration To enable the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI Using the J Web Interface on page 39 e Using the CLI on page 40 Using th
13. NOTE The RJ 45 and SFP ports 20 23 are shared ports The SFP port will always take priority over the corresponding RJ 45 port if they are both connected Location Middle of the XPIM Description NOTE Each port on the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE XPIM supports Power over Ethernet PoE Each Gigabit Ethernet port e Provides link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps e Uses an RJ 45 connector Operates in full duplex and half duplex modes e Supports flow control e Supports autonegotiation 4 1 Gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP ports labeled 20 23 See Table 60 on page 145 for supported SFP transceivers NOTE The RJ 45 and SFP ports 20 23 are shared ports The SFP port will always take priority over the corresponding RJ 45 port if they are both connected Right side of the RJ 45 ports 0 23 Use these ports to connect various SFP transceivers for fiber cable connections Captive screws One on each side of the XPIM Use the captive screws to hold the XPIM in place Handles One on each side of the XPIM Use the handles to grasp the XPIM for installation or removal You can customize the Ethernet interface type by using different SFP transceivers Table 60 on page 145 shows the available SFP transceivers NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks SFP and XFP transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver t
14. Supported maximum speed e For ANSI DMT 8 Mbps downstream and 896 Kbps upstream For G 992 1 8 Mbps downstream and 1 2 Mbps upstream For G 992 3 12 Mbps Annex A or 10 Mbps Annex B downstream and 1 2 Mbps Upstream For G 992 5 24 Mbps downstream and 1 2 Mbps upstream Supported ATM QoS e CBR VBR e RTVBR Supported encapsulation e ATM PVC Ethernet over ATM Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 page 38 Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica MTU Default and Maximum Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards 36 Related Documentation The 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM supports the following standards ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Annex A only ITU G 992 1 G dmt ITU G 992 3 ADSL2 ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 33 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Port ADS
15. The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM must be installed in one of the following 20 Gigabit slots on the services gateway SRX550 Slot 6 SRX650 Slot 2 or 6 NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 131 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Figure 31 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM TI eo T6Gig Om Gp G GH Gp WG Bp We XPIM SF Sey ee ear tS pea We So jes pS lee rn Litt THIN CA um Tr THOTT THOTT THOTT i DA ml a A A EM HJE Ha wa Yoo ye OME I NA__LNKIACT LINE 032725 Figure 32 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE XPIM ss ss ss ss oer 16GigE_ POE q Za l Gap Gp UW YU VY XPIM a lI Tey wo A oo oo Jor oo Me La Hii j fm Hi Hied wg W H m TOON Tonni f TOTT I TOIT T O j L sts Oni feet Jeet JS Le feo Jest A E Oone POE __LINKIACT o A N N oO D Related 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 Documentation e 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 133 e 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 135 16 Port Gi
16. aoe PA Arari KEER EEK mso eO 9032727 Figure 38 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE obit ee MEE ip Om Om Op Om Om On Wy STATUS onuiney OFFLINE 9032728 Related 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 Documentation 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM contains the components listed in Table 59 on page 143 Table 59 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components Component Location Description XPIMONLINE OFFLINE button Right side of the XPIM Use the XPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button to Only SRX650 Services gracefully shut down the XPIM Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 143 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 59 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components continued Component 24 fixed Gigabit Ethernet ports labeled 0 23 NOTE The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE XPIM port labels are yellow instead of white
17. 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 121 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122 e 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features 122 Related Documentation The 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the following key features Autoselection of operational modes based on data terminal equipment DTE or data circuit terminating equipment DCE cables Local remote and dce local loopback diagnostics e Clock rate from 1 2 KHz to 8 MHz Clocking mode DCE clock Internal Baud clock and External loop clock Complete configuration and management using the CLI Maximum transmission unit MTU values of 1504 bytes default and 9192 bytes maximum e Line encoding for NRZ and NRZI modes Support for Frame Relay PPP PAP CHAP Cisco HDLC MLFR and MLPPP with the maximum throughput at 44 Mbps for 64 byte packets Support for data signal and control signal alarms Support for invert data e Support for Serial auto resync Support for loopback modes local and remote and for ignoring control signals Support for receiving SNMP information at each port e 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on pag
18. Pair 4 T58 Clear to Send A T22 8 O Pair 5 T20 Terminal Timing A T68 9 O Pair 6 T66 Request to Send A 196 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 89 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pairing Description T26 10 Local Loopback T67 TI O Pair 7 T65 Terminal Ready A T63 12 Pair 8 T61 Data Mode A T64 13 O Pair 9 T62 Receive Ready A T56 17 l Pair 10 T54 Receive Timing A T18 19 Shield Ground T24 20 Shield Ground T57 22 l Pair 1 T59 Receive Data B T2 23 O Pair 2 T25 Send Timing B T32 24 O Pair 3 T34 Send Data B T58 25 Pair 4 T60 Clear to Send B T20 26 O Pair 5 T22 Terminal Timing B T66 27 O Pair 6 T68 Request to Send B T65 29 O Pair 7 T67 Terminal Ready B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 197 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 198 Related Documentation Table 89 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pairing Description T l 30 Pair 8 T63 Data Mode B T62 31 O Pair 9 T64 Receiver Ready B T54 35 Pair 10 T56 Receive Timing B T27 37 Shield Ground T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier EIA 449 DTE
19. The Interfaces page lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway Verify whether the interface has been configured by reviewing the information in the Configured column yes no Select the name of the parent interface you want to edit o NOTE You must configure the parent CT 1 or CE1 interface before you configure the child T1 or El interface respectively From the CT1 CE1 Interfaces General Configuration page for the parent CT1 or CEI interface select no for the Partitioning field Click OK to save changes Select the name of the child interface T1 or E1 you want to edit To use the port on the GPIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any To use the port on the GPIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 17 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM c Click OK to save changes and
20. VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T33 1 Shield Ground T16 2 O Pair 1 T14 Send Data A T4 3 l Pair 2 T39 Receive Data A T50 4 Pair 3 T48 Request to Send A T42 5 l Pair 4 T40 Clear to Send A T45 6 Pair 5 T43 Data Mode A T43 22 I Pair 5 T45 Data Mode B Wey 7 Shield Ground T46 8 l Pair 6 T44 Receive Ready A T36 9 Pair 7 T38 Receive Timing B T44 10 l Pair 6 T46 Receiver Ready B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 94 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T2 ii Pair 8 T4 Terminal Timing B T9 12 Pair 9 T7 Send Timing B T40 13 Pair 4 T42 Clear to Send B T14 14 O Pair 1 T16 Send Data B WH 15 Pair 9 15 Send Timing A T39 16 l Pair 2 T4 Receive Data B T38 17 Pair 7 T36 Receive Timing A TIO 18 O Local Loopback T48 19 O Pair 3 T50 Request to Send B T49 20 Q Pair 10 T47 Terminal Ready A T47 23 Pair 10 T49 Terminal Ready B T4 24 O Pair 8 T2 Terminal Timing A T13 to T15 Protocol Identifier_O T35 to T33 Protocol Identifier_2 TltoT3 Protocol Mode Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 215 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Phys
21. A T68 D O Request to Send A T67 E O Terminal Ready A T64 E O Receive Ready A T63 H Data Mode A T26 KI Local Loopback T59 P l Pair 1 T57 Receive Data A T34 R Oo Pair 2 T32 Send Data A T57 S l Pair 1 T59 Receive Data B T32 T Pair 2 T34 Send Data B T56 U Pair 3 T54 Receive Timing A 224 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 97 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 M34 1 NV eZ O and Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T22 V Pair 4 T20 Terminal Timing A T54 Ww l Pair 3 T56 Receive Timing B T20 X O Pair 4 T22 Terminal Timing B T25 Y O Pair 5 T23 Send Timing A T23 AA Pair 5 T25 Send Timing B T31 to T30 Protocol Identifier_O T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier Related EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod Mod U U U U U U U U e on page 199 e on page 194 e on page 214 e on page 210 e on page 206 e on page 202 e on page 220 e on page 218 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Se
22. Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview Very high bit rate digital subscriber line VDSL technology is part of the xDSL family of modem technologies which provide faster data transmission over a single flat untwisted or twisted pair of copper wires The SRX210 Services Gateway supports the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM The 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM carries the Ethernet backplane When the Mini PIM is plugged into the chassis the Mini PIM connects to one of the ports of the baseboard switch The 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM on the SRX Series Services Gateway provides ADSL backward compatibility The 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM is compatible with the ITU T G 993 2 VDSL2 standard Figure 23 on page 90 shows the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 89 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Figure 23 VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module H
23. ESD damage which can cause intermittent or complete component failures Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap and verify that it is in direct contact with your skin A CAUTION For safety periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap The measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms When handling any component that is removed from the chassis verify that the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the ESD points on the chassis Avoid contact between the component and your clothing ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components When removing or installing a component always place it component side up on an antistatic surface in an antistatic card rack or in an electrostatic bag See Figure 9 on page 23 If you are returning a component place it into an electrostatic bag before packing it Figure 9 Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag CAUTION AL ELECTROSTATIC C J SENSITIVE t DEVICES DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE STATIC FREE WORKSTATION 1551 Related gt Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Documentation Gateway on page 24 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 23 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Removing a Blank Gigabit Bac
24. Figure 5 Example of a Double High Double Wide XPIM Ber oor oe x 2AGigE BR A GW BW YY UY Yo Bin Yin Shy Sh yy Vy XPIM maea fate ba AL AL a AE EA o ae 9032724 Related Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Documentation on page 22 Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces The SRX Series Services Gateways support the following Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs l Port Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP l Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP e ADSL2 e DOCSIS e G SHDSL Serial Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 7 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide TI EI e VDSL2 The SRX Series Services Gateways support the following Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules GPIMs XPIMs e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM e Quad CT1 E1 GPIM e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ether
25. Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Semice GAO WAY s 5 sick ac dm eR dite cob pegs ace AE Sree Go ee ass Moke are 2S 24 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway 000 eee eee 27 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway cece eee eens 28 Mini Physical Interface Modules Supported on the SRX Series Services Gateway l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module cccc cece 33 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 00000 33 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications 34 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface SDECIIGALIONS 2b ceAGu0 ted a vere a ended hows sedate bow eh een es dade nead 35 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards 36 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 37 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 000 37 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback DIASNOStICS 22s dia Ge dik wed NE aan aad aq dew aneaae Pea a eres 38 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 39 Using the J Web Interface 0 eee eee 39 ISIS EC lerse ease Secon wach ens Grae aE a Bank a ghee eaten ae a eos a 40 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical In
26. Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day 7 days a week using any of the following methods On the Web Using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support By telephone From the US and Canada 1 888 314 JTAC e From all other locations 1 408 745 9500 NOTE If contacting JTAC by telephone enter your 11 digit case number followed by the pound key if this is an existing case or press the star key to be routed to the next available support engineer Related Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 D tati ocumentanon e Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 237 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC on page 237 Packing the Hardware Components for Shipment on page 238 Packing the Hardware Components for Shipment Follow these guidelines for packing and shipping individual components of the services gateway When you return a component make sure that it is adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton Use the original shipping materials if they are available e Place individual Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs in e
27. Ox7e or Supported Supported all ones Related Documentation 100 Counters Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPI l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPI Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPI Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPI Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPI Runts giants Runts giants M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Supported Standards on page 101 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 11 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components on page 103 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 105 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM supports the following standards DS3 mode standards Related Documentation ANSI T1102 T1107 11 404 e Telecordia GR 499 CORE GR 253 CORE GR 449 CORE Telecordia TR TSY OO0009 e AT amp T Technical Reference 54014 E3 mode standards ITU G 751 G 823 G 703 Telecordia GR 499 CORE Port C Port C Port C l Port C Port C Port C Port C 1 Port C ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3
28. Power over Ethernet See PoE preventing electrostatic discharge damage 23 Q QAM quadrature amplitude modulation 43 QPSK quadrature phase Shift keYING ccseseeseeeeees 43 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM COMPOMEMMS eccscccscssssesescsessscsessesesesssesesscsesesssessesesesesees configuring With J We b sesesseerssserssrrserrresrrssrrrerrrenn configuring with the CLI interface SPECIFICATIONS cesses cesses KEY feat fe Snit iiti CED SIAE Senone aR N R A OLSI AVALE AO specifications R removing blank face plate nnidnnannnuninnnainnsioni 24 SP Misses essere as ciao es ee EE 29 returns COMPONEMMS ceccsssssssesesesssesessesesescsesesecsescseseseeeeeeaeaes Services BATCWAY ccccescsescsssssssscsesesssssstscscsescsesesececaesees RJ 11 connector pinouts RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector crossover DIM OUTS ccscsesesscsccsssssssessseseesssesssessscscscscecseseasessasatateeeeenens 170 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector straight DIMOUTS viii eerie E 169 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector crossover DINOUTS ca eee ees 168 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector straight DINOUTS scien ie diiciedie ees 168 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc RJ 48 pinouts Minis PIM scccke iit nited RR 167 S Serial Mini PIM OVEIVIEW knn N ARRETAN 67 serial number label GPIM cseessessesssseeseesesteseeseeseeseees 236 services gateway Mini PIMS sss ssssesssessseessrersrnnssenessnrsnreosrnssnressreosneros
29. The device does not support channelization but it supports a subrate DS3 E3 configuration The DS3 E3 interface is a popular high bandwidth WAN interface for large enterprise branch locations that enables high quality voice video and data applications with reduced latency The clear channel implementation provides such features as subrate and scrambling options used by major DSU vendors The interface also supports loopback bit error rate test BERT and far end alarm and control FEAC diagnostic capabilities It supports Frame Relay Point to Point Protocol PPP and High Speed Data Link Control HDLC serial encapsulation protocols The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM is suitable for Branch office and regional sites for medium sized to large enterprises Corporate headquarters for medium sized enterprises The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM supports IP configurations Using the command line interface CLI you can configure the l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM to operate in either DS3 or E3 mode Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 97 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM can be plugged into any GPIM slot on the services gateway Figure 24 on page 98 shows the 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM front panel Figure 24 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Front Panel eo m m m S E ooo wr
30. Weight 3 36 oz 95 g Connector type SFP Form factor Mini PIM Related l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 Documentation l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 75 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 76 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 77 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 78 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications Table 31 on page 74 gives the network interface specifications of the 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM Table 31 1 Port SFP Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications Specifications 1 Port SFP Specification Operating modes Full duplex and half duplex VLAN support 802 19 virtual LANs Class of service support Supported Encapsulations DIX LLC SNAP CCC TCC and VLAN CCC Loopback diagnostic feature Supported Related l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 73 Documentation l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 74 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 74 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 8 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 75 e l Port SFP Mini Phy
31. 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications This topic includes the following sections EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 74 on page 173 gives the EIA 530A DCE cable pinouts 172 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 74 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM
32. 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM XPIM Oak OFFLINE 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 110 Figure 27 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM oo 4 r Oact i 0 A un wn oo oo wan wan un 2x10GigE O STATUSO Oun Oact g032740 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features 110 The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM supports the following key features Contains a total of four ports e Two SFP fiber ports Two 10 G Base T copper ports Only two of the four ports can be active at the same time one from port group O and one from port group 1 Mixing and matching between the copper and fiber port types is Supported Receives SFP optics and at a minimum supports these SFP transceivers e SFPP 1OGE SR e SFPP 1OGE LR e SFPP 1OGE ER e SFPP 1OGE LRM e Copper Twin AX Im Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM e Copper Twin AX 3m e Copper Twin AX 5m e Copper T
33. 116 the J Web interface the Point and Click CLI or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 116 Using the Point and Click CLI to Set Interface Mode and Speed Options on page 117 Using the CLI on page 117 To perform basic configuration for the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway Verify whether the interface has been configured by reviewing the information in the Configured column yes no Select the interface name to edit To use the port on the XPIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a b Select Configure gt Security gt Zones Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All Click OK and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any To use the port on the XPIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a b Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt
34. 135 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration To enable the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 136 Using the CLI on page 137 Using the J Web Interface To perform basic configuration for the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway Verify whether the interface has been configured by reviewing the information in the Configured column yes no 2 Select the interface name to edit 3 To use the port on the XPIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK an
35. 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E Documentation Mini Physical Interface Module on page 167 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 168 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 169 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications This topic includes the following sections e RJ 11 Connector Pinouts for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 171 RJ 11 Connector Pinouts for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module The l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM uses an RJ 1 cable which is not supplied with the Mini PIM Table 73 on page 171 gives the RJ 11 connector pinouts Table 73 RJ 11 Connector Pinouts for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM Pin Signal No connect 2 No connect Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 171 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 73 RJ 11 Connector Pinouts for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM continued Pin Signal 3 RJ P Tip 4 RJ N Ring 5 No connect 6 No connect Related l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 33 Documentation Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34
36. Apply Policy Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any NOTE You cannot configure the mode and speed options for the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM using the J Web interface You must either use the Point and Click CLI or the CLI to configure them For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Using the Point and Click CLI to Set Interface Mode and Speed Options Using the CLI To set the interface mode and speed options for the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with the Point and Click CLI From the J Web interface main menu select Configure gt CLI Tools gt CLI Tools gt Point and Click CLI Next to Interfaces click Configure or Edit The Interfaces page displays Click the Interface name or click Edit The details page for the specified interface appears To set the mode for the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM select either fiber or copper from the Mode drop down list box NOTE By default interfaces run in fiber mode at 10 G speed with autonegotiation from the Speed drop down list box NOTE For copper ports all 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1 G and 10 G speeds are supported for fiber ports only 1G and 10 G speeds are supported Click OK to save cha
37. CONFISULATION Lu eseessesesceeseseeseseseseseeseseeseseeeeees 70 basic CONMFIQULATION ceeccccccssssscecsssscscessseccessccesssseseesseesens EIAS30 cable DCE ssessesctssesetestnstietetietieeietne 70 hardware SPECIFICATIONS ccecccccccsssceeeesssecesssseessteseeeseee 34 EIAS30 Cable DTE ssssesstestsstestnststetetetnetien 70 key FEATULCS eeeecccccsssceceessseccssssecesesceseessesecseseeesssseeetseseessese 37 hardware Specifications 68 LED stae e eea e trade EA 38 interface CADLES rererertsrstrntntneetetetneeetnnes 69 Dt ate 37 key features loopback diagnostics UE nT nT nee 38 LED StAlES innn Nan network interface specifications E EEE EAS 35 LEDS Sna a RN OVER VIOW rennon a A tonite ate 33 RS232 cable DCE coeessesssesseeneerseenseiseensetnetisenne supported StANGALAS cccecsccssseesssssssessssesssesssessseesssesseees 36 RS232 cable DTE eoesssssssesseeseetseensetnetnntenennnenne 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM RS449 cable DCE siete Jive ian a COM POMENtS vessseccis fee oearncernscarstume eases RS449 cable DE ssesseesessesstssestsetietnettntietnatne configuring With the CLlececcccccssssccecsssscccsscseceessessesseeees supported standards a interface specifications V35 Cable DCE sis ccccrstsstcasinietaistncdiaiteds key FCALULCS eccccssscceesssscccessssececsescessssssscessseeessssssetsseesenseee V 35 cable DTE veeessesestsntestssetnetnetnttntinerntenetnen LED States ceccsssstntsssssntntitseietntntietetintesietetee X 21 cable DC
38. Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 199 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 90 on page 199 gives the EIA 449 DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Tab
39. Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any To use the port on the GPIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 16 Dual CT1 E GPIM c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Using the CLI to Configure the CT Interface To perform basic configuration for the Dual CT1 E1 GPIM for the CT1 interface and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI D NOTE You must configure the parent CT1 interface before you can configure the child T1 interface e Verify that the Dual CT1 E1 GPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Configure the parent CT interface with no partitioning set interfaces ctl 3 0 0 no partition interface type t1 Configure the child T1 interface and assign an IP address set interfaces tl 3 0 0 unit O family inet address ip4 address prefix Assign MTU values to the child T1 interface set interfaces tl 3 0 0 unit O mtu mtu values Configure a security zone for the child T1 interfac
40. DS3 E3 LOS AIS ALARM O O OQ 9032741 O LPBK O O RDI OOF O NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 98 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 99 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Key Features on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM LEDs on page 102 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components on page 103 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 105 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications 98 The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the hardware specifications listed in Table 40 on page 98 Table 40 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 76 in x 6 72 in x 8 52 in 19 2 mm x 170 8 mm x 216 4 mm Weight 1 11 lb 0 504 kg Connector type DSX3 interface with dual female 75 ohm BNC coaxial connectors separate Tx Rx Form factor Single high single wide GPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 104 F O C throug
41. E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 167 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 168 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module on page 169 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 170 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module The l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM uses an RJ 48 cable which is not supplied with the Mini PIM A CAUTION To maintain agency approvals use only a properly constructed shielded cable Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 167 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 69 on page 168 gives RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector straight pinouts Table 69 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on 1 Port RJ 48 Pin Data T1 E Mini PIM Numbering Form 1 RX Ring 2 2 RX Tip 4 4 TX Ring 5 5 TX Tip 3 3 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground 7 No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 168 RJ 48 Connect
42. E3 GPI M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Network Interface Specifications on page 99 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 M Components on page 103 M Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 M Basic Configuration on page 105 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Key Features The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the following key features Framed and unframed DS3 E3 modes Line encoding for DS3 E3 modes Support for Frame Relay PPP and HDLC serial encapsulation protocols External and internal clocking support Support for DS3 E3 network alarms Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 101 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation e Support for chassis clusters Support for anti counterfeit check Loopback local remote and payload and BERT PRBS and ORSS diagnostics support Support for generation and detection of loopback control codes line loopback activate and deactivate and FEAC codes Maximum transmission unit MTU size of 4474 bytes default and 9192 bytes maximum l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Overview on page 97 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 98 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 99 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards on p
43. Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation NOTE F r Sverige och Norge endast Att ansluta en enhet via en jordad kontakt och eller via annan utrustning samtidigt som den ar kopplad till ett kabel tv system inneb r en brandrisk F r att f rebygga detta m ste du placera en galvanisk isolator mellan enheten och kabel tv systemet The note translates as follows For Sweden and Norway only Connecting a device through a grounded outlet and or through other equipment while it is also connected to a cable TV system creates a fire risk To prevent this you need to place a galvanic isolator between the device and the cable TV system Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS page 43 Port DOCS Port DOCS Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica nn A Ww Mini Physica S Mini Physica S Mini Physica Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu e Key Features on page 42 e Supported Standards on page 43 e Hardware Specifications on page 44 e Network Interface Specifications on e LEDs on page 45 e Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 42 Related Documentation The Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has the following key features Provides high data transfer ra
44. Ground T34 4 O Pair 1 T32 Send Data A T25 5 Pair 2 123 Send Timing A T59 6 l Pair 3 T57 Receive Data A T68 7 Pair 4 T66 Request to Send A T56 8 Pair 5 T54 Receive Timing A T60 9 Pair 6 T58 Clear to Send A T28 10 O Local Loopback 200 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 90 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 i i Pin Pairing Description T63 1 Pair 7 T l Data Mode A T67 12 O Pair 8 T65 Terminal Ready A T64 13 Pair 9 T62 Receive Ready A T22 17 O Pair 10 T20 Terminal Timing A TE 19 Shield Ground T24 20 Shield Ground T32 22 O Pair 1 T34 Send Data B T23 23 Pair 2 T25 Send Timing B T57 24 Pair 3 T59 Receive Data B T66 25 O Pair 4 T68 Request to Send B T54 26 Pair 5 158 Receive Timing B T58 27 Pair 6 T60 Clear to Send B T61 29 Pair 7 T63 Data Mode B T65 30 O Pair 8 T67 Terminal Ready B T62 31 Pair 9 T64 Receiver Ready B T20 35 O Pair 10 T22 Terminal Timing B T27 37 Shield Ground T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier_1 T19 to T18 Protocol Mode Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 201 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation EIA 449 DCE Cable P
45. Interface Module on page 206 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface e RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Mod e V 35 Mod V 35 Mod X21 Mod X21 Mod ule on page 220 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface ule on page 222 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface ule on page 226 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface ule on page 229 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface ule on page 232 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 194 Table 89 on page 194 gives the EIA 449 DCE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 89 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T17 1 Shield Ground T4 4 l Pair 1 T39 Receive Data A TZ 5 O Pair 2 T5 Send Timing A T16 6 O Pair 3 T14 Send Data A T42 7 Pair 4 T40 Clear to Send A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gatew
46. O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing ual CT1 E1 GPIM Overview on page 149 ual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 D D Dual CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs on page 152 D ual CT1 E1 GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs 152 Related Documentation The Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the LED listed in Table 63 on page 152 Table 63 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM LED States LED eo o g State Description STATUS Green On GPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On GPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On GPIM has failed Dual CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 149 e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 Dual CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E 1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components Chapter 16 Dual CT1 E GPIM The Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM contains the components listed in Table 64 on page 153 Table 64 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components Component GPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button On
47. Port T1 E1M l Port T1 E1M set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all For El interfaces set security zones security zone trust interfaces el 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all D NOTE You can use the CLI commands set interfaces tl 1 0 0 or set interfaces el 1 0 0 to enable the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM to function as a T1 or an El interface e l Port T1 E1l Mi ni Physi ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi Port T1 E Mini Physical ca ca Port T1 E1 Mini Physical nterface Module Overview on page 81 nterface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 nterface Module Supported Standards on page 83 nterface Module LEDs on page 84 nterface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 10 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 91 e l Port VDSL2
48. Send Data A T4 3 Pair 3 T39 Receive Data A T50 4 O Pair 4 T48 Request to Send A T42 5 l Pair 5 T40 Clear to Send A T45 6 Data Mode A T37 7 Shield Ground 206 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 92 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 O and Pin Pin Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T46 8 Pair 6 T44 Receive Ready A T36 9 Pair 7 T38 Receive Timing B T44 10 Pair 6 T36 Receiver Ready B T2 1 O Pair 8 T4 Terminal Timing B ms 12 Pair 2 T4 Send Timing B T40 13 l Pair 5 T42 Clear to Send B T14 14 O Pair 1 T16 Send Data B T7 15 Pair 2 T50 Send Timing A T39 16 l Pair 3 TA Receive Data B T38 17 Pair 7 T36 Receive Timing A TIO 18 O Local Loopback T48 19 O Pair 4 T50 Request to Send B T49 20 O Terminal Ready A T51 23 Shield Ground T4 24 O Pair 8 T2 Terminal Timing A T11 to T15 Protocol Identifier T35 to T33 Protocol Identifier_2 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 207 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 92 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 2
49. Serial Number Label on page 236 e Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC on page 237 e Contacting Customer Support on page 237 e Packing the Hardware Components for Shipment on page 238 Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label This topic includes the following sections e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini PIM Serial Number Label on page 236 SRX Series Services Gateway GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini PIM Serial Number Label Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs are field replaceable on the SRX Series Services Gateway Each Mini PIM has a unique serial number The serial number label is located on the right side of the Mini PIM when the Mini PIM is horizontally oriented as it would be installed on the device The exact location might be slightly different on different Mini PIMs depending on the placement of components on the Mini PIM SRX Series Services Gateway GPIM Serial Number Label Related Documentation 236 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules GPIMs are hot swappable and field replaceable on the SRX Series Services Gateway Each GPIM has a unique serial number The exact location might be slightly different on different GPIMs XPIMs or GPIMs depending on the placement of the components on the GPIM D NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs e Return Pr
50. Specifications KEY Teatre Sminia a eae KEY FOACULOS ccceeeesccssssssssessssssssssssstesssssssssssetsssssssssseetesssee LED states LED states LEDs Peer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee EDS ainesosa pin e at loopback GIO SEIS itt eerie P2 operating modes network interface specificationS eeeeren 82 1X8 wire l port B Wire seesccssessssssssssesssseeeee 60 OVOIVICW iiss teeta tien ttid bed eni A 8 2X4 wire 2 Port 4 Wire sesssssssessssssssssesnee 60 supported standardS s sesessserssrrierriesrrrerrresrrrerrrenrrne 83 4X2 wire 4 POrt 2 WIE cccceesesceeseseeseseeeeeees 60 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 241 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM u csecesesteseseeseseeeseees 89 ANNEX Acvinnndecdceetiini ai iniii 89 basic CONFISULATION 0 ccecescssesesseseseeseseesesesesseseeeeseeenees 94 hardware SPECIFICATIONS cece eseeeseeteseseeeeeeees 91 key features OVEIVIEW d ee a Profle Sisan aa aa e naa En Eara E 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COMPONENUS cescsesesesessesssesesesesesseccsesesesessessscseseseeeesees 35 configuring With J We b sessssssseeriresrirerrrerrreerrrerrne 136 configuring with the CLl s sssssssssriresrrrerrrerrrserrerrn 136 key features suana a 32 LED States irean a S 133 OVEPV EW ausson a 131 SPOCIFICATIONS c ccccscesesssses
51. Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Interface Module Key Features on page 84 Interface Module LEDs on page 84 nterface Mo dule Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications 82 The l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has the network interface specifications given in Table 35 on page 82 Table 35 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications Specification TI Specification El Specifications _ Network interface specifications Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 9 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Table 35 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications continued Specification TI Specification El Specifications Transmit bit rate 1 544 Mbps 2 048 Mbps Receive bit rate 1 544 Mbps 2 048 Mbps Line encoding AMI B8ZS HDB3 Mode Framed Clear Channel Framed Clear Channel Unframed Clear Channel Fractional Framing HDLC features 7 N x 64 Kbps or N x 56 Kbps nonchannelized data rates Superframe D4 SF Extended Superframe ESF T1 N 1 to 24 G704 without CRC4 Unframed E1 N 1 to 31 CRC 16 32 16 32 Shared Flag Supported Supported Idle flag fill Supported Supported Counters Runts Giants FCS Error Abor
52. Timing B 59 24 60 Receive Data B 38 25 B7 Request to Send B 51 26 52 Receive Timing B 47 27 48 Clear to Send B 34 29 33 Data Mode B 10 30 9 Terminal Ready B 14 31 13 Receiver Ready B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 179 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 78 RS 422 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued DC 37 LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 37 Pin Pairing Description 6 35 5 Terminal Timing B 57 37 Send Common 26 to 25 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Phy
53. all Related l Port C Documentation s 1 PortC l Port C e l Port C l Port C 1 Port C l Port C l Port C Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Network Interface Specifications on page 99 M Supported Standards on page 101 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 M Components on page 103 M Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 107 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 108 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM This chapter includes the following topics e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 110 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM provides a connection to high speed Ethernet networks through branch WAN service and allows carriers to provide multiple levels of Etherne
54. click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Using the CLI to Configure the CT Interface To perform basic configuration for the Quad CT1 E GPIM for the CT interface and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI D NOTE You must configure the parent CT1 interface before you can configure the child T1 interface e Verify that the Quad CT1 E1 GPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Configure the parent CT interface with no partitioning set interfaces ctl 1 0 0 no partition interface type t1 Configure the child T1 interface and assign an IP address set interfaces t1 1 0 0 unit O family inet address ip4 address prefix Assign MTU values to the child T1 interface set interfaces tl 1 0 0 unit O mtu mtu values Configure a security zone for the child T1 interface and set the configuration for host inbound traffic services and protocols set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 1 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 1 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Using the CLI to Configure the CE1 Interface To perform basic configuration fo
55. cz Le S D O B S E S S O A D A A O A A O E Y rrr X X 0 Ig ACT LINK ACT LINK XPIM g N H Ouk Ouk Ni STATUSO Lt Oat 4 r L_ Omt KOF 0 1 D e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 110 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 113 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM contains the components listed in Table 46 on page 114 Table 46 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components Component Location Description XPIMONLINE OFFLINE button Right side of the XPIM Use the XPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button to Only SRX650 Services gracefully shut down the XPIM Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Two groups of ports labeled O Middle of the XPIM e Copper ports support link and 1 where each group contains 1 copper port and 1 fiber port NOTE By default all ports are flow control enabled and support link speed of 10 Gin full duplex mode The 10 G fiber port does not support autonegotiation Use the fiber ports to connect various SFP t
56. device before removing or installing Mini PIMs Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway To remove a Mini PIM from the SRX Series Services Gateway 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface on which you intend to place the Mini PIM 2 Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the grounding point on the back of the device 3 Unplug the power adapter from the device Verify that the Power LED is off 4 Label the cables connected to the Mini PIM so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct Mini PIM 5 Disconnect the cables from the Mini PIM 6 If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points 7 Remove the screws on each side of the Mini PIM faceplate using a screwdriver 8 Grasp the screws on each side of the Mini PIM faceplate and slide the Mini PIM out of the device See Figure 8 on page 21 Figure 8 Removing a Mini PIM from the SRX Series Services Gateway st us 2 20 E Captive Screws 9 Place the Mini PIM in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat 10 If you are not reinstalling a Mini PIM into the empty slot install a blank faceplate over the slot to maintain proper airflow D NOTE When installing a blank Mini PIM faceplate make sure that the padded side of the faceplate is facing up R
57. e Transmit bit rate 2 048 Mbps e Receive bit rate 2 048 Mbps Captive screws One on each side of the GPIM Use the captive screws to hold the GPIM in place in the services gateway Related Documentation uad CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 157 uad CT1 E 1 GPIM LEDs on page 160 uad CT1 E GPIM Key Features on page 158 Q Q Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 Q Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration To enable the Quad CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM installed on your SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 161 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 162 e Using the CLI to Configure the CT Interface on page 163 e Using the CLI to Configure the CE Interface on page 163 Using the J Web Interface 162 To perform basic configuration for the Quad CT1 E1 GPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports
58. for repair or replacement Table 101 Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateways Component Step Task For more information see Determine the part number and serial Locating the SRX Series Services number of the device or component Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 2 Obtain a Return Materials Authorization Information You Might Need to Supply RMA number from JTAC to JTAC on page 237 3 Pack the SRX Series Services Gateway Packing the Hardware Components component for shipping for Shipment on page 238 O NOTE Donotreturn the device or any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an RMA number Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA Refused shipments are returned to the customer via collect freight Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 235 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation For more information about return and repair policies see the customer support Web page at http www juniper net support guidelines html For product problems or technical support issues open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 outside the United States e Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM
59. on page 110 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 e 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 112 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs Related Documentation The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the LEDs listed in Table 45 on page 113 Table 45 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LED States LED Color State Description STATUS Green On XPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On XPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On XPIM has failed Off XPIM has no power and can be pulled out safely LINK ACT Link Green On Port is online for fiber ports Off Port is offline Activity Green Blinking Port is sending data NOTE For fiber ports the Activity LED does not blink when the port is only receiving data Off Port might be on but is not receiving or sending data LINK ACT Link Green On Port is online for copper ports NOTE Each port has Off Port is offline two LEDs one on either side of the port Activity Green Blinking Port is sending data The left LED is activity and the right is link Off Port might be on but is not receiving or sending data Figure 28 on page 113 shows the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Figure 28 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM
60. on page 19 Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 20 Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module The following tools and parts are required for replacing Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs on the SRX Series Services Gateway Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat for each component Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1 8 in 3 mm Phillips screwdrivers number 1 Related Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Documentation Services Gateway on page 18 Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 19 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 17 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 20 e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway To maintain proper airflow through the services gateway a blank faceplate should cover any empty Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM slot A CAUTION Do not remove a blank faceplate unless you are installing a Mini PIM in the empty slot A CAUTION The Mini PIMs available on the S
61. page 24 CAUTION If you remove a double high double wide GPIM you should replace the bracket before you install blank faceplates or other GPIMs This is important for maintaining radio frequency compliance e Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 e Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 22 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway 28 A CAUTION Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway To remove a GPIM from the SRX Series Services Gateway 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 23 2 Push the OFFLINE button to turn the GPIM offline After the STATUS LED light turns off it is safe to remove the GPIM See Figure 13 on page 29 and Table 13 on
62. page 75 e Key Features on page 76 e LEDs on page 77 e Basic Configuration on page 78 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview The 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM provides connectivity to a single Gigabit Ethernet device or to a network Figure 21 on page 73 shows the l Port SFP Mini PIM front panel Related Documentation Figure 21 1 Port SFP Mini PIM Front Panel L7 L tink ACT Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc g031018 e Hardware Specifications on page 74 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 e Supported Modules on page 75 e Key Features on page 76 e LEDs on page 77 e Basic Configuration on page 78 73 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 30 on page 74 gives the physical specifications of the 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM Table 30 1 Port SFP Mini PIM Physical Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 80 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm
63. 0 Transmit Data B 56 15 55 Transmit Clock A 2 16 1 Receive Data B 5 17 6 Receive Clock A Al 18 Local Loopback 47 19 48 Request to Send B 83 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 23 Signal Ground 52 24 Sil Terminal Timing A 26to25 z 30 to 29 a 18 to 17 2 Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 175 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 e V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module 176 Tabl
64. 1 in 4 pattern 1 7 or 1 in 8 pattern 3 24 3 bits set in every 24 bits QRSS20 Modified PRBS 2 20 1 with 14 zero suppression PRBS 2 7 1 PRBS 279 1 as specified in ITU T 0 153 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 85 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation PRBS 2711 1 as specified in ITU T 0 153 2047 pattern PRBS 2715 1 as specified in ITU T 0 151 0 153 PRBS 2 20 1 as specified in ITU T 0 153 Programmable word or 32 bit programmable pattern Network T1 alarms LOS LOF AIS YLW Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 84 M Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 84 M Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration To enable the l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can con
65. 15 dBmV A TDMA 8 to 54 dBmV 32 QAM 64 QAM 8 to 55 dBmV 8 QAM 16 QAM 8 to 58 dBmV QPSK S CDMA 8 to 53 dBmV all modulations Input impedance 75 nominal 75 nominal Frequency range 108 to 1002 MHz edge to 5 to 42 MHz US edge Channel bonding Up to 4 channels Up to 4 channels Related l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 41 Documentation e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 42 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 43 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 44 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 18 on page 44 lists the hardware specifications of the Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Table 18 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 80 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm Weight 4 40 oz 125 g Connector type F Type coaxial connector Form factor Mini PIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing 44 Copyright 2012 Juniper Network
66. 19 to T18 Protocol Mode Related gt EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 217 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 95 on page 218 gives the RS 232 DCE
67. 2 Clear to Send B T36 IB Pair 5 T38 Receive Timing B T35 to T33 Protocol Identifier_2 232 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 100 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output ice and VHDCI 68 DB 15 1 DB 15 2 Input Pin 1 Pairing Description mitom Protocol Mode T52 1 Shield Ground T34 2 Pair 1 152 Send Data A T68 3 O Pair 2 T66 Request to Send A 159 4 Pair 3 JS Receive Data A T60 5 Pair 4 T58 Clear to Send A T56 6 Pair 5 T54 Receive Timing A T55 8 Shield Ground T32 9 O Pair 1 T34 Send Data B T66 10 O Pair 2 T68 Request to Send B Ty a Pair 3 T59 Receive Data B T58 12 Pair 4 T60 Clear to Send B T54 13 Pair 5 T56 Receive Timing B T53 to T52 Protocol Identifier_2 T19 to T18 Protocol Mode Related EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 233 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 234 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gig
68. 28 14 41 Verify the PIC status show chassis fpc pic status root srx650r03 gt show chassis fpc pic status Slot 0 Online FPC PIC O Online 4x GE Base PIC Slot 2 Offline FPC Slot 5 Offline FPC Slot 6 Online FPC PIC O Online 4x CT1E1 gPIM Slot 7 Offline FPC Slot 8 Online FPC PIC 0 Online 1x CLR CH T3 E3 Set the DS3 E3 port mode for example DS3 mode set chassis fpc lt fpc no gt pic O port O framing t3 e3 D NOTE By default the PIC comes up in DS3 mode and the t3 x y z physical interface is created The port mode chosen for t3 is IFDP_T3 and the port mode chosen for e3 is IFDP_E3 Assign the port an IP address set interfaces t3 3 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Assign MTU values set interfaces t3 3 0 0 unit O family inet mtu mtu values Enable disable unframed DS3 mode for example unframed set interfaces t3 3 0 0 t3 options unframed Set encapsulation Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 11 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM set interfaces t3 3 0 0 encapsulation cisco hdlc Add or select a security zone for example trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces t3 3 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic set security zones security zone trust interfaces t3 3 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit
69. 48 cable PINCUS cece esesseseseessseeesesseseseeseees 167 transceivers SEP science aca kha dariniai 115 145 X XPIMs COMPONEMMS cccscscsescssssesescsesesesessescscscseseseeecsesees double high double wide e double high single Wide ses ssserserrrsrrrerrierrresrreerrn hardware SPECIFICATIONS cesses LED oo e S eee OVEIVIOW iieiea anli a RR single high single wide Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Index 245 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 246 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc
70. 5 2 O and i i Pin Input 1 Pairing Description TI to T3 Protocol Mode T52 Shield Ground T34 2 O Pair T32 Send Data A T59 3 Pair 3 T57 Receive Data A T68 4 O Pair 4 T66 Clear to Send A T60 5 l Pair 5 T58 Data Mode A T63 6 l Shield Ground T18 T Receive Ready A T64 8 l Pair 6 T62 Receive Timing B T54 9 Pair 7 T56 Receiver Ready B T62 10 l Pair 6 T64 Receiver Ready B T20 1 O Pair 8 T22 Terminal Timing B T23 12 Pair 2 T25 Send Timing B 158 13 Pair 5 T60 Clear to Send B T32 14 O Pair 1 T34 Send Data B T25 15 Pair 2 125 Send Timing A T57 16 l Pair 3 T59 Receive Data B 208 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 92 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 O and i Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T56 T7 Pair 7 T54 Receive Timing A T28 18 O Local Loopback T66 19 O Pair 4 T68 Request to Send B T67 20 O Terminal Ready A T24 23 Shield Ground T22 24 O Pair 8 T20 Terminal Timing A T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier T53 to T52 Protocol Identifier_2 T19 to T18 Protocol Mode Related EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backpla
71. 51 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs on page 152 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Overview A Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM is a network interface card NIC that installs in the front slots of the SRX550 or SRX650 Services Gateway to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The GPIM receives incoming packets from a network and transmits outgoing packets to a network The Dual CT1 E GPIM provides the physical connection to T1 or El network media types and performs T1 or El framing and line speed signaling NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs The Dual CT1 E1 GPIM can be plugged into any GPIM slot on the services gateway Figure 39 on page 150 shows the Dual CT1 E GPIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 149 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Figure 39 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM TI DUAL CT1 E1 or E tS GPM Dmso Dmi Ea O L CERTO ort Related Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 Documentation Dual CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E 1 GPIM LEDs on page 152 Dual CT1 E GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Installing a Gigabit Backpla
72. 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 6 eee nets 210 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical lmtenface MOGUIES cian sewn cds masine ridt OHSEE TS ERENS ER EE ES 214 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 2 52 rosent ee Ged we Bad sow ess been oko 218 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Mod le o 5 2s nnocka xodimnod htsd eetban ss ba tade daw ov 220 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical mternaca Modules na oxen oon ok oee eben dSaenae neoe Raa 222 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Inteniage Mod le occas ikanni siandn Sakasi COON Ae AGAR SOE eH 226 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Mod le ararsan arterna meonh ahd edie db RSCHR MS Sie 229 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical internace IMOGUIE y cc 9s othe dt omits Sow te Soe Pa S40 doe ec orenaare 232 Appendix B Contacting Customer Support and Returning SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components 00 cece eee eee eens 235 Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components 235 Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label 0 0 00 00 cc ccc eee eee nae 236 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini PIM Seria
73. 67 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 168 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 170 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Table 72 on page 170 gives RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector crossover pinouts Table 72 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on DB 15 Pin Data Numbering TI EI Mini PIM Form 9 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 RX Tip lt gt TX Tip 4 1 TX Ring lt gt RX Ring 5 3 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip 3 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground Z No connect No connect 170 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 72 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts continued RJ 48 Pin on DB 15 Pin Data Numbering TI EI Mini PIM Form 8 No connect No connect 9 No connect No connect 10 No connect No connect 1 No connect No connect 12 No connect No connect 13 No connect No connect 14 No connect No connect 15 No connect No connect Related gt RJ 48 Connector to RJ
74. 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs Related Documentation The 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has the following LEDs to indicate the state of the Mini PIM and its four ports one LED for each port Table 26 on page 63 describes the LED states Table 26 1 Port G SHDSL Mini PIM LED States Name Color State Description STATUS Green On Port is online with no alarms or failures Amber On Port is initializing Red On Port has detected an alarm LINK Green On Link is active NOTE There are four E ree LINK LEDs available Blinking Data communication is taking place on the G SHDSL Mini PIM Each LED Off Link is inactive provides the link status of the wire pair e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Feature
75. C 0 Online 8x Sync Serial gPIM Slot 6 Online FPC PIC 0 Online 24x GE POE gPIM 3 Verify that the serial network interface that you want to configure on the GPIM is up user host gt show interfaces terse The following sample output shows that the serial network interface you are configuring is up root srx 650 a gt show interfaces se 4 0 terse Interface Admin Link Proto Local Remote se 4 0 0 up up se 4 0 1 up up se 4 0 2 up up se 4 0 3 up up se 4 0 4 up up se 4 0 5 up up se 4 0 6 up up se 4 0 7 up up The following sample output shows extensive details of se 4 0 0 on the interface root srx 650 a gt show interfaces se 4 0 0 extensive Physical interface se 4 0 0 Enabled Physical link is Up Interface index 150 SNMP ifIndex 773 Generation 177 Type Serial Link level type PPP MTU 1504 Maximum speed 8mbps Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 127 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 128 Device flags Present Running Interface flags Point To Point Internal 0x0 Link flags Keepalives Hold times Up O ms Down O ms CoS queues 8 supported 8 maximum usable queues Last flapped 2012 03 01 11 07 13 PST 10 57 02 ago Statistics last cleared Never Traffic statistics Input bytes 0 0 bps Output bytes 0 0 bps Input packets 0 0 pps Output packets 0 0 pps Input errors Errors 3 Drops 0 Framing errors 3 Runts 0 Giants 0 Policed dis
76. Dual female 75 ohm BNC coaxial connectors TX transmit and RX receive Captive screws One on each side of the GPIM Use the captive screws to hold the GPIM in place l Port C Port C 1 Port C Port C 1 Port C Port C 1 Port C Port C ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI ear Channel DS3 E3 GPI M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Network Interface Specifications on page 99 M Supported Standards on page 101 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 M Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 M Basic Configuration on page 105 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics 104 The l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the following loopback diagnostics DS3 mode local remote payload E3 mode local and remote Test patterns BERT All ones All zeros Alternating ones and zeros AA 55 PRBS 2715 1 as specified in ITU T 0 151 PRBS 2 20 as specified in ITU T 0 153 PRBS 2 23 1 as specified in ITU T 0 151 PRBS PRBS PRBS 2 9 2711 1 2 29 1 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation PRBS 2731 1 Chapter 11 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM QRSS 2 20 1 as specified in ITU
77. E veerorsrereststseietntntnetetetntnenetetnt loopback diagnostics SOS X 21 cable DTE E E aa E A OVENI E Wi seein EO l Port SFP Mimi PIM sssssessssessseesseesseetnsettnettnsteinetieetee SPOCIFICATIONS cceeecccecccsssssesessseecssssssecseeseessssssceceseeeeseseees DASIC CONFIGUTATION reessesseesseeneeineessetneenneinens supported StANArAS cscssscssccesssssessesssessssessseeesee hardware SPeCIFICATIONS ceeceseessceseeseeesesteseseeesenees 74 J Port DOCSIS Mini PlM cccccccccccccccccccccccceccccoceccccececcececceceeeeee key FEATULES ee ceccscssescsseescescsesscsessesesessessscesseeeeestseseseeeeses 76 DASIC CONFIQUrAtION sescsscccsscssssssssessssssesssesssessssssssseene LED Stata Sinauna aa I RRE 78 hardware specifications ESOS lar ee 77 key FOALULCS eccccccsssccecssesccesssssecssseceesssseseesesesessssseessteceesseee network interface SPECIFICATIONS 14 SS acca ee cect seeceacce ee tesco OVETVIEW os resrsstsstsstsstnetnetsetnetnetnt network interface specifications supported modules OVEFVIQW ecccccccesccccsecssecccsccssesssssssssecsscccsesseseseseseseessstssssseseess l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module supported StANGALAS ecscccsscsssssssessesnsesssssnsessesere basic COMPISUMAT ON ca tiscckscccectssvcccstarceaccvessiessstarseociatctstens 86 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Minin PIM occccccccccccccccccccscsssssesssceee l Port T E Mini PIM ccescscsesesssssssscsessssesscssseseseseeees 81 Boe iseina a nardware ere at Nea eee B4 hardware
78. Features 53 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 54 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic COMSUKATION 2 04 ete te pateie man dciaagen ator ete Gee eee eae GOES 54 Using the J Web Interface 0 eee eae 55 Usimethe Clue wc kathy acu nee ease E ra m aa a a N E E 55 Chapter 6 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module 59 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 59 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported StaMGandS 2 404 54 nc 0e eres eewaat eae Sewer dea sue aoe et Grae wees 60 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes 60 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 61 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications reiner menr e EE EEEE E a eE an E A O 62 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Modules Basic Configuration 64 Using the J Web Interface ciir nerro cerre eee eee 64 Usimpe the Cl tcrd ota as cetdee nee Ho eK ee eee eee hee A 65 Chapter 7 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module ccc cece eee eee 67 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 000 0 eee 67 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications 68 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface
79. Gateway on page 24 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions When configuring a port on a Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM or Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM you must know the slot and port number assigned by the system The slot number identifies the slot on the device in which you insert the Mini PIM or GPIM and is typically named 1 2 3 and so on The port number is the port on the Mini PIM or GPIM that is being configured The name of each network interface has the following format to identify the physical device that corresponds to a single physical network connector type slot pim port Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 13 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide For SRX Series Services Gateways pim equals O for the port naming convention Table 10 on page 14 lists the typical interface types and interface numbers Table 10 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Port Number Examples Interface Type Interface Number Example ATM over ADSL at 1 0 0 G SHDSL at 1 0 0 TI tl 1 0 0 El el 1 0 0 1 Port SFP ge 1 0 0 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP ge 1 0 0 Serial se 1 0 0 DOCSIS cm 1 0 0 VDSL2 pt 1 0 0 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM t3 3 0 0 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM
80. Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components Component XPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Location Right side of the XPIM Description Use the XPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button to gracefully shut down the XPIM 16 fixed Gigabit Ethernet ports labeled O to 15 NOTE The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE XPIM port labels are yellow instead of white Middle of the XPIM NOTE Each port on the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE XPIM supports Power over Ethernet PoE Each Gigabit Ethernet port e Provides link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps e Uses an RJ 45 connector e Operates in full duplex and half duplex modes e Supports flow control e Supports autonegotiation Captive screws One on each side of the XPIM Use the captive screws to hold the XPIM in place in the services gateway Handles One on each side of the XPIM Use the handles to grasp the XPIM for installation or removal Related Documentation 6 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPI 6 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPI 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPI 6 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPI M Overview on page 131 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 M LEDs on page 133 M Hardware Specifications on page 133 M Basic Configuration on page 136 Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc
81. Interface Module Overview 0 0 cece eee 81 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications 82 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications 82 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards 83 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 000 84 l Port T1I E Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 000000005 84 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback DIaBMOSUGS 2 i 06 5 cjc doaaernadiegacad ababe veuddlnads E a bared 85 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 86 Using the J Web Interface 0 eee eee 86 Usine the CLizccagesesactwewaevou ces ete Gated ei Hake AE ae eas 87 Chapter 10 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module 89 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 89 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 90 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles 91 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware SPeCCIiCAHOMS s2 6654 d 08 2 ocian aderada dee ang Sew eseeomate an soGe ork aa 91 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 92 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 93 Using the J Web Interface s essre errs enira drest eee ees 93 Us
82. JUNIP EL NETWORKS SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Published 2012 06 11 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine developed by Epilogue Technology an Integrated Systems Company Copyright 1986 1997 Epilogue Technology Corporation All rights reserved This program and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes copyright 1988 1989 1993 University of Toronto This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California Copyright 1979 1980 1983 1986 1988 1989 1991 1992 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved GateD software copyright 1995 the Regents of the University All rights reserved Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators Gated is based on Kirton s EGP UC Berkeley s routing daemon routed and DCN s HELLO routing protocol Development of Gated has been s
83. L 8 Wire Mini PIM Wire Modes on page 188 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment on page 189 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment on page 190 e Standard RJ 45 Cable Pin Assignment on page 191 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 187 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Wire Modes 188 The 1 Port G SHDSL 8 wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM requires different combination of RJ 45 cables depending upon the connection available on the patch panel Table 84 on page 188 lists the cables that you can order from Juniper Networks to connect the l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Table 84 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Cable Part Numbers Connections Details 1X8 wire Standard RJ 45 connector 2X4 wire RJ 45 connector that connects to two RJ 11 connectors SRX CBL RJ45 2RJ11 NOTE The SRX CBL RJ45 2RJ11 is not shipped with the G SHDSL Mini PIM and must be ordered separately 4X2 wire RJ 45 connector that connects to four RJ 11 connectors SRX CBL RJ45 4RJ11 NOTE The SRX CBL RJ45 4R3J11 is shipped with G SHDSL Mini PIM The following topology diagrams show different G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM connections Figure 41 on page 188 shows the topology for a G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM operating in 2X4 wire mode Figure 41 G SHDSL Mini PIM Operating in 2X4 Wire Mode VPIVCI 8 80 BeJ
84. L2 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 35 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation l Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 38 Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Chapter 3 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features The 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the following key features Automatic configuration of the ADSL after negotiating with the DSLAM Support for ADSL ADSL 2 and ADSL2 protocols on the same interface card Dying Gasp support MLPPP on one interface Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 encapsulation Support of latency modes fast and interleave Support for ATM AAL5 with CBR VBR nrt and UBR traffic types Support for 10 permanent virtual circuits PVCS l Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 35 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 38 Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Interface Module Net
85. Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 78 on page 179 gives the RS 422 449 DCE cable pinouts 178 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 78 RS 422 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM DC 37 LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 37 Pin Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 4 2 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A 60 6 59 Receive Data A 37 7 38 Request to Send A 52 8 51 Receive Timing A 48 9 47 Clear to Send A 45 10 Local Loopback 33 1I 34 Data Mode A 9 12 10 Terminal Ready A 13 13 14 Receive Ready A 5 17 6 Terminal Timing A 36 19 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 2 22 1 Send Data B 55 23 56 Send
86. Module Supported Standards 68 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 69 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 000005 69 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Interface Cables 69 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 70 Using the J Web Interface eee eens 71 Using Ine CL errerare enine rine en n a E PETE NAA 7 Chapter 8 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module asnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnno 73 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 0 73 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules 75 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 000 76 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 00000 77 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 78 Using the J Web Interfaces ccc cc ces Seeks Rae ae EENE u E deed gaan 78 USING the CUl eerror d ne Gone to eeerehamie aa A OE eee meee 79 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc vii SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Chapter 9 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 0cc eee ee ee eeaee 81 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical
87. Modules continued Product Number SFP GE40KT15R13 Interface Type Connector 1000BASE BX at 40km TX1550 LC nm RX1310 nm EX SFP FE20KT13R15 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics LC at 20 km TX 1310 nm RX 1550 nm EX SFP FE20KT15R13 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics LC at 20 km TX 1550 nm RX 1310 nm NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks SFP and XFP transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver type can be different in each port as long as a supported part number is used Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu e Overview on page 73 e Hardware Specifications on page 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 e Key Features on page 76 e LEDs on page 77 e Basic Configuration on page 78 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 76 The 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM has the following key features Enables you to install and remove transceivers without powering down the device Provides real time visual status of connectivity and traffic flows Provides Link Up Down alarm Supports the following transceiver types JOOOBASE SX JOOBA
88. O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Related 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 Documentation e 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 135 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 136 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the LEDs listed in Table 54 on page 133 Table 54 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LED States D Go olg State Description STATUS Green On XPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On XPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On XPIM has failed Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 133 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 134 Related Documentation Table 54 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LED States continued D Color State Description LINK ACT Green On Port is online Off Port is offline Blinking Port is receiving or sending data N A N A N A Not used on the non PoE XPIM NOTE ThisLEDis not applicable on the non PoE 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM See Figure 33 on page 134 PoE Green On Port is PoE enabled and online NOTE Applicable on the PoE XPIM only Off Port is offline S
89. PIM Components on page 161 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 The Quad CT1 E1 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the LED listed in Table 67 on page 160 Table 67 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM LED States LED STATUS Go log State Description Green On GPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On GPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On GPIM has failed Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Overview on page 157 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Key Features on page 158 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Quad CT1 E GPIM Components on page 161 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Components Chapter 17 Quad CT1 E GPIM The Quad CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM contains the components listed in Table 68 on page 161 Table 68 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Components Component GPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Location Description RightsideoftheGPIM Use the GPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button to gracefully shut down the GPIM Four fixed T1 E1 ports labeled 0 3 Each port can be configured using the CLI in T1 or E mode Middle of the GPIM TI Mode e Transmit bit rate 1 544 Mbps e Receive bit rate 1 544 Mbps El Mode
90. Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the hardware specifications listed in Table 44 on page 112 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 11 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 44 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 78 in H x 6 72 in W x 8 01 in L 1 98 cm x 17 08 cm x 20 57 cm Weight 18 6 oz 53 kg Connector Types Contains a total of four ports e Two SFP fiber ports e Two 10 G Base T copper ports Port O is grouped as one copper port and one fiber port and port 1 is grouped as one copper port and one fiber port Mixing and matching between the copper and fiber ports is supported Supported SFPs Receives SFP optics and at a minimum supports these SFP transceivers SFPP 1OGE SR e SFPP 1OGE LR e SFPP 1OGE ER e SFPP 1OGE LRM e Copper Twin AX Im e Copper Twin AX 3m Form factor Single high single wide XPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 104 F O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Power consumption Estimated at 20 W Throughput 7 5 Gbps across two ports in routed mode Related 2 Port10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 Documentation 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features
91. Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 50 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter Specifications on page 51 ace Module Network Interface l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 53 e l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 54 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 54 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features The 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM has the following key features Supports hot swappable transceivers Real time visual status of connectivity and traffic flows Provides Link Up Down alarm Half duplex full duplex support Autonegotiation D NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver type can be different in each port as long as a supported part number is used Related l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 Documentation l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 50 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network In
92. Quad CT1 E GPIM provides the physical connection to T1 or El network media types and also performs T1 or El framing and line speed signaling D NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Figure 40 on page 158 shows the Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 157 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Figure 40 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM TI eo QUAD T1 E1 pe Toa P a Fal GPIM STATUSO GFEUNE o L CRD CRD CRD CRD 9032730 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 158 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E GPIM LEDs on page 160 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Components on page 161 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 e Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features Related Documentation 158 The Quad CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the following common key features for both T1 and El modes Channel service unit data service unit CSU DSU to eliminate the need for a separate external device 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps operating modes Independent internal and external clocking option Alarm reporting
93. RX Series Services Gateway are not hot swappable You must power off the device before removing or installing Mini PIMs To remove a blank faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the device 2 If the device is powered on power off the device Verify that the Power LED is off 3 Loosen the screws on each side of the faceplate On faceplates with handles use a 1 8 in 3 mm flat blade screwdriver to loosen but not remove the captive screws On faceplates without handles use a number 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the noncaptive screws 4 Remove the faceplate See Figure 6 on page 18 Figure 6 Removing a Blank Mini PIM Faceplate from an SRX Series Services Gateway Captive Screws Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module on page 17 Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 19 Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 20 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway A CAUTION The Mini PIMs available
94. S O Pair 1 T16 Send Data B T39 I Pair 2 TA Receive Data B T4 U O Pair 3 T2 Terminal Timing A 226 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 98 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 Pin M34 1 Pin M34 2 Pin Dir Output O and Input 1 Pairing Description T38 M l Pair 4 T36 Receive Timing A T2 W O Pair 3 T4 Terminal Timing B T36 x Pair 4 T38 Receive Timing B T7 Y l Pair 5 T5 Send Timing A 15 AA Pair 5 WH Send Timing B T13 to T12 Protocol Identifier_O TIl to T15 Protocol Identifier TI to T3 Protocol Mode T52 A Shield Ground T55 B Shield Ground T68 O Request to Send A T60 D Clear to Send A T63 E Data Mode A T64 F Receive Ready A T67 H O Terminal Ready A T28 KI O T32 Local Loopback T34 B O Pair 1 Wa Send Data A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 227 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 98 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output O and VHDCI 68 M34 1 VEVA 7 Input Pin 1 Pairing Description T59 R l Pair 2 T34 Receive Data A T32 5 Pair 1 T59 Send Data B T57 T l Pair 2 T20 Receive Data B T22 U O Pai
95. SE LX JOOOBASE LX10 JOOBASE FX JOOOBASE T Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs JOOOBASE LH ZX Chapter 8 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Tri Rate 10 100 1000BASE T Copper Transceiver JOOOBASE BX10 at 10 km TX1310 nm RX1490 nm JOOOBASE BX10 at 10 km TX1310 nm RX1550 nm JOOOBASE BX10 at 10 km TX1490 nm RX1310 nm JOOOBASE BX10 at 10 km TX1550 nm RX1310 nm JOOOBASE Bx at 40 km TX1310 nm 1550 nm JOOOBASE BxX at 40km TX1550 LC nm RX1310 nm 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics at 20 km TX 1310 nm RX 1550 nm 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics at 20 km TX 1550 nm RX 1310 nm NOTE The1 Port SFP Mini PIM with Ethernet connector provides 1OOO Mbps link speed Actual bandwidth is limited to 100 Mbps NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks SFP and XFP transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver type can be different in each port as long as a supported part number is used Port SFP Mini Physica Port SFP Mini Physica Interface Modu Interface Modu e Overview on page 73 e Hardware Specifications on page 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 Port SFP Mini Physica Port SFP Mini Physica Interface Modu Interface odu e LEDs on page 77
96. SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview Related Documentation A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM is a network interface card NIC that is installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The Mini PIM receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the network Table 3 on page 4 lists the Mini PIMs and their model numbers Table 3 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini PIMs Model Numbers Mini PIMs Model Numbers 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP SRX MP 1SFP l Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor SRX MP 1SFP GE Pluggable SFP ADSL2 SRX MP 1ADSL2 A Annex A SRX MP 1ADSL2 B Annex B DOCSIS SRX MP 1IDOCSIS3 G SHDSL SRX MP 8GSHDSL Serial SRX MP 1Serial TIVE SRX MP 1TIE1 VDSL2 Annex A SRX MP 1VDSL2 A Annex A The Mini PIMs supported on the SRX Series Services Gateway are field replaceable You can install a Mini PIM into the Mini PIM slot on the front panel of the services gateway chassis A CAUTION The Mini PIMs available on the SRX Series Services Gateway are not hot swappable You must power off the device before removing or installing Mini PIMs e Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Servi
97. Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway D NOTE To maintain proper airflow through the services gateway leave blank faceplates in place over slots that do not contain GPIMs Do not remove a blank faceplate unless you are installing a GPIM in the empty slot If you need to remove a blank faceplate to install the new GPIM into this slot see Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 NOTE Installing aGPIM on the SRX550 Services Gateway is similar to installing a GPIM on the SRX650 Services Gateway To install a GPIM 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 23 2 Grasp the handles on each side of the GPIM faceplate and align the edges of the GPIM circuit board with the guide rails at each side of the GPIM slot D NOTE If you are installing a double high double wide GPIM such as the 24 Port Ethernet XPIM you must remove the center GPIM slot bracket 3 Slide the GPIM into the services gateway until it seats firmly in the device A CAUTION Slide th
98. Set link options set interfaces ge 2 0 0 gigether options auto negotiation Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 2 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 2 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Related SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions on page 13 Documentation 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 143 e Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 147 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 148 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 16 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM This chapter includes the following topics e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Overview on page 149 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 1
99. Supported Standards on page 68 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 69 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 69 M M M M M M e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration To enable the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 71 e Using the CLI on page 71 70 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 7 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Using the J Web Interface Using the CLI To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name se 1 0 0 and click Edit To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other t
100. T 0 151 BERT results should be in the following form e Received bit count e Received error count In conformance with ANSI T1 107 1995 the 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM supports both generation and detection of FEAC codes as well as line loopback activate and deactivate control codes l Port C l Port C l Port C e l Port C l Port C l Port C l Port C e l Port C ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Network Interface Specifications on page 99 M Supported Standards on page 101 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 M Components on page 103 M Basic Configuration on page 105 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration Using the CLI Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc To enable the 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the basic configuration tasks using the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the CLI on page 105 To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the l Port C
101. TU Default MTU Maximum MTU Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 1 Port Clear 1504 1500 1504 9192 Channel DS3 E3 2 Port 10 Gigabit 1514 1500 1514 9192 Ethernet XPIM 16 Port Gigabit 1514 Unspecified 1514 Unspecified Ethernet XPIM 24 Port Gigabit 1514 Unspecified 1514 Unspecified Ethernet XPIM Related SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 D mentation ocumentato Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements Table 8 on page 11 shows the power consumption value of each Physical Interface Module PIM Table 8 PIM Power Consumption Values Power Consumption PIM Model Watts Port small form factor pluggable SFP Mini PIM 4 29 Port Gigabit Ethernet small form factor pluggable SFP 44 Mini PIM ADSL2 Mini PIM 411 DOCSIS Mini PIM 7 00 G SHDSL Mini PIM 8 31 Serial Mini PIM 4 29 T1 E1 Mini PIM 1 92 VDSL2 Mini PIM 9 80 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 1 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 8 PIM Power Consumption Values continued Power Consumption PIM Model Watts Dual CT1 E GPIM 16 81 Quad CT1 E GPIM 16 81 8 Port Serial GPIM 13 1 l Port Clear Channe
102. Transmit Data A 60 R 59 Receive Data A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 80 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin Pairing Description 2 S 1 Transmit Data B 59 T 60 Receive Data B 5 U 6 Terminal Timing A 52 M 5 Receive Timing A 6 Ww 5 Terminal Timing B 51 X 52 Receive Timing B 56 Y 55 Transmit Timing A 595 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 e X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Modul
103. X Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 22 Supported 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Modules Connector Type SFP Juniper Product Number Transceiver JX SFP 1FE FX OOBASE FX LC JX SFP 1GE LH 1000BASE LH ZX LC JX SFP 1GE LX OOOBASE LX LC JX SFP 1GE SX 1OOOBASE SX LC JX SFP 1GE T Tri Rate 10 100 1000BASE T CAT 5e Copper Transceiver SFP GEIOKT13R14 1OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km Ke TX1310 nm RX1490 nm SFP GEIOKT13R15 OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1310 nm RX1550 nm SFP GEIOKT14R13 1OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1490 nm RX1310 nm SFP GEIOKTI5RI3 OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1550 nm RX1310 nm SFP GE40KT13R15 1OOOBASE BX at 40 km TX1310 LC nm 7 1550 nm SFP GE40KT15RI13 OOOBASE BX at 40 km TX1550 LC nm RX1310 nm EX SFP FE20KT13R15 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics LC at 20 km TX 1310 nm RX 1550 nm EX SFP FE20KT15R13 100Base BX Fast Ethernet Optics LC at 20 km TX 1550 nm RX 1310 nm NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver type can be different in each port as long as a supported part number is used Related l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 Documentation 52 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 5 1
104. abit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc APPENDIX B Contacting Customer Support and Returning SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC on page 237 Contacting Customer Support on page 237 Packing the Hardware Components for Shipment on page 238 Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components Follow the tasks list provided in Table 101 on page 235 to return an SRX services gateways or component to Juniper Networks
105. age 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM LEDs on page 102 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components on page 103 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 105 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM LEDs 102 The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the LEDs described in Table 42 on page 102 Table 42 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIMLED States LED Color State Description STATUS Green On GPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On GPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On GPIM has failed Off GPIM has no power and can be removed safely LOS Amber On Loss of signal online LPBK Amber On Loopback is on AIS Amber On Port is receiving alarm indication signal AIS alarm Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 11 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Table 42 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM LED States continued LED Color State Description RDI Amber On Port is receiving remote defect indication RDI alarm ALARM Green On There are no alarms or defects Red On An alarm or a defect is present OOF Amber On Out of frame OOF RX multi frame is not aligned Related l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Overview on page 97 Documentation l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specific
106. age 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the hardware specifications listed in Table 57 on page 141 Table 57 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 1 58 in H x 13 49 in W x 8 5 in L 40 2 cm x 34 3 cm x 21 6 cm Weight 2 79 lb 1 27 kg Connector types 24 RJ 45 and 4 small form factor pluggable SFP ports NOTE Ports 20 to 23 are shared so you can use either the RJ 45 copper ports 20 23 with 10 100 1000 Mbps or the SFP connector ports 20 23 for 1 Gigabit connectivity Supported SFPs Juniper Internal SFPs e LX 1GB e SX 1GB FX 100 Mbps e TX 1GB ZX 1GB External SFPs e Finisar Form factor Double high double wide XPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Related 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 Documentation Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 141 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on
107. al GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T52 1 Shield Ground T59 2 l Pair 1 TSZ Receive Data A T34 3 Pair 2 T32 Send Data A T60 4 Pair 3 T58 Clear to Send A T68 3 Pair 4 T66 Request to Send A T67 6 O Pair 5 T65 Terminal Ready A T65 22 Pair 5 T67 T18 7 Shield Ground T64 8 O Pair 6 T62 Receive Ready A T20 9 O Pair 7 T22 Terminal Timing B T62 10 O Pair 6 T64 Receiver Ready B T54 T l Pair 8 T56 Receive Timing B T25 12 O Pair 9 T25 Send Timing B T66 13 O Pair 4 T68 Request to Send B TS 14 Pair 1 T59 Receive Data B T25 15 O Pair 9 T23 Send Timing A 212 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 93 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T32 16 O Pair 2 T34 Send Data B T22 17 O Pair 7 T20 Terminal Timing A T26 18 Local Loopback T58 19 Pair 3 T60 Clear to Send B T63 20 Pair 10 T61 Data Mode A T l 23 Pair 10 T63 Data Mode B T56 24 Pair 8 T54 Receive Timing A T31 to T27 Protocol Identifier_O T53 to T52 Protocol Identifier_2 Related gt EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199
108. ality for GPIMs Before you begin to configure the GPIM Ensure that you have configured security zones on the services gateway Ensure that you have configured security policies on the services gateway D NOTE This topic shows a basic configuration that applies a security zone to all protocols and a default policy set You can also configure specific zone settings and policies on the interface Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GPIM To configure the 8 Port Serial GPIM and configure a network interface on the GPIM 1 Verify that the 8 Port Serial GPIM is installed in the services gateway user host gt show chassis hardware The following sample output shows that FPC 3 PIC O is the GPIM Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis AJ2409AA0005 SRX650 Midplane REV 08 710 023875 AAAB4991 System IO REV 08 710 023209 AAAC3710 SRXSME System IO Routing Engine RE SRXSME SRE6 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC FPC 3 REV 00 750 038290 AADB5216 FPC PIC 0 8x Sync Serial gPIM FPC 6 REV 11 750 023872 AAAV8510 FPC PIC 0 24x GE POE gPIM Power Supply 1 Rev 02 740 024283 1F00372 PS 645W AC 2 Verify that the PIC on the GPIM is online user host gt show chassis fpc pic status The following sample output shows that FPC 3 PIC O is online root srx 650 b run show chassis fpc pic status Slot 0 Online FPC PIC O Online 4x GE Base PIC Slot 3 Online FPC PI
109. anada and Mexico For international or direct dial options in countries without toll free numbers visit us at http www juniper net support requesting support html Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc xvii SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide xviii Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc PART 1 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Overview Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 3 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 17 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 2 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces This chapter includes the following topics e SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Overview on page 3 e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 e SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements on page 11 Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Int
110. ane Physical Interface Modules Supported on the SRX Series Services Gateway l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM on page 97 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM on page 109 8 Port Serial GPIM on page 119 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM on page 131 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM on page 139 Dual CT1 E GPIM on page 149 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM on page 157 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 95 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 96 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 11 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM This chapter includes the following topics Port C Port C l Port C l Port C Port C Port C Port C Port C l Port C ear Channe ear Channe ear Channel ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe ear Channe DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI DS3 E3 GPI l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Overview M Overview on page 97 M Hardware Specifications on page 98 M Network Interface Specifications on page 99 M Supported Standards on page 101 M Key Features on page 101 M LEDs on page 102 M Components on page 103 M Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 M Basic Configuration on page 105 The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM functions as a clear channel interface that can support DS3 T3 or E3 line rates of 44 796 or 34 368 Mbps respectively
111. ardware Specifications on page 91 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 90 Related Documentation The following features are supported on the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 backward compatibility with Annex A Annex M support Packet Mode Transfer PTM or Ethernet in the First Mile EFM 802 3ah support Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM support for ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 mode Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM quality of service QoS supported only when the VDSL2 Mini PIM is operating in ADSL2 mode Multilink Point to Point Protocol MLPPP supported only when the VDSL2 Mini PIM is operating in ADSL2 mode Support for a maximum of 10 permanent virtual connections PVCs only in ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 mode Dying Gasp support ADSL and VDSL2 mode Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 91 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 Copyright 2012 Juniper Ne
112. arts are required for replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM on the SRX Series Services Gateway Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat for each component Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1 8 in 3 mm Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 Blank panels if no component is installed Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to the SRX Series Services Gateway Many services gateway hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V You can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge
113. ase LR Ethernet optical Lic transceiver SFP 10 Km reach SFPP 1OGE ER 10GBase ER Ethernet optical LC transceiver SFP 40 Km reach SFPP 1OGE LRM 10GBase LRM Ethernet optical EG transceiver SFP 220 m reach Copper Twin AX Im 10GE Ethernet cable assembly plugs into SFP socket 15 m reach Cable connector with 1m cable length Copper Twin AX 3m 10GE Ethernet cable assembly plugs into SFP socket 15 m reach Cable connector with 3 m cable length Copper Twin AX 5m 10GE Ethernet cable assembly plugs into SFP socket 15 m reach Cable connector with 5 m cable length Copper Twin AX 7m 10GE Ethernet cable assembly plugs into SFP socket 15 m reach Cable connector with 7 m cable length Related Documentation 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 110 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration To enable the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform configuration tasks using Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 5 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Using the J Web Interface
114. atement to which it applies rsvp Required for dynamic MPLS only square brackets Enclose a variable for which you can substitute one or more values community name members community ids Indention and braces Identify a level in the configuration hierarchy semicolon WebGUI Conventions uns Bold text like this Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level Represents J Web graphical user interface GUI items you click or select edit routing options static route default nexthop address retain e Inthe Logical Interfaces box select All Interfaces e To cancel the configuration click Cancel gt bold right angle bracket Separates levels in a hierarchy of J Web selections In the configuration editor hierarchy select Protocols gt Ospf SRX Series Documentation and Release Notes For a list of related SRX Series documentation see http www juniper net techpubs hardware srx series main html If the information in the latest Junos OS Release Notes differs from the information in the documentation follow the Junos OS Release Notes Obtaining Documentation To obtain the most current version of all Juniper Networks technical documentation see the products documentation page on the Juniper Networks website at http www juniper net techpubs To order printed copies of this guide and other Juniper Networks technical
115. ates training is in progress TX RX Green Blinking Indicates that traffic is passing through Off Indicates that no traffic is passing through Related l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 Documentation l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 92 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 10 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 91 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration To enable the l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 93 e Using the CLI on page 94 Using the J Web Interface To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the serv
116. ateway is similar to installing a GPIM on the SRX650 Services Gateway Table 12 Slot Groups for Double High Double Wide GPIMs Slot Groups for Double High Double Wide GPIMs SRX550 Top four standard slots slots 5 6 7 and 8 SRX650 Bottom four standard slots slots 1 2 3 and 4 and top four standard slots slots 5 6 7 and 8 Before installing the double high double wide GPIM you must first remove the center GPIM guide rail bracket 1 Remove the four blank GPIM slot covers from the slots into which you will install the double high double wide GPIM 2 Using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver remove the screw from the center GPIM guide rail bracket as shown in Figure 12 on page 28 and remove the guide rail bracket 3 Store the guide rail bracket for later use The guide rail bracket can be stored on the rack mount bracket as shown in the callout in Figure 12 on page 28 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 2T SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Figure 12 GPIM Slot Bracket ct cite Giants conto ota sie ie Bae oat Aenea Se ee 5i see on ae RE a 5 ae EEE g032722 4 To continue with the GPIM installation see Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on
117. ation 00 115 Using the J Web Interface eens 116 Using the Point and Click CLI to Set Interface Mode and Speed Options 117 Using the Cut sreerircee raea e a a e oA 117 viii Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Table of Contents Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GRIM s i orentis piani tudtam eae e ed sade cases dele s 119 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview naasna nannu eee enna 119 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications s 0 0 00 cee 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications 0005 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Key FeatureS suaa naaa eee eae 122 8 Port Seral GPIMMLEDS s cnaceceaeen bad t eI r A E hs ean ce EY 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Components 0 0 eee eens 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables 0 0 eee eee 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration 0 0 0 cc eee eee 126 Chapter 14 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 00 ccc eee 131 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview 6 0 eee 131 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key FeatureS 0 0 0 ccc eee 132 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications 0 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDS 0 0 0 0 000 c ccc eee eens 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components a an 00000 cece eee eee 135 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration 0005 136 Using the J Web Interface 0 eee eee ae 136 WISiNS EHV ocad chetennonGaode ce ee De w
118. ations on page 98 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 99 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Key Features on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components on page 103 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 105 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM contains the components listed in Table 43 on page 103 Table 43 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components Component Location Description ONLINE OFFLINE button Right side of the GPIM Use the ONLINE OFFLINE button to gracefully shut down Only SRX650 Services the GPIM Press down and hold Gateway supports the button for 4 to 5 seconds hot swappable functionality then release The GPIM for GPIMs gracefully shuts down and turns off the power supply units PSUs To power up the GPIM if the Services and Routing Engine SRE is off press and hold the ONLINE OFFLINE button for 4 to 5 seconds Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 103 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 43 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components continued Component TX and RX coaxial connectors Location Description Middle right of the GPIM
119. ays Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 89 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T4 8 O Pair 5 T2 Terminal Timing A T50 9 O Pair 6 T48 Request to Send A T8 10 Local Loopback T49 TI O Pair 7 T47 Terminal Ready A T45 12 Pair 8 T43 Data Mode A T46 13 O Pair 9 T44 Receive Ready A T38 7 Pair 10 T36 Receive Timing A T33 19 Shield Ground M37 20 Shield Ground T39 22 l Pair 1 TA Receive Data B IS 23 O Pair 2 WH Send Timing B T14 24 O Pair 3 T16 Send Data B T40 25 Pair 4 T42 Clear to Send B T2 26 O Pair 5 T4 Terminal Timing B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 195 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 89 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T48 27 O Pair 6 T50 Request to Send B T47 29 O Pair 7 T59 Terminal Ready B T43 30 Pair 8 T45 Data Mode B T44 31 O Pair 9 T46 Receiver Ready B T36 33 Pair 10 T38 Receive Timing B T51 37 Shield Ground T1 to T15 Protocol Identifier T52 1 Shield Ground T59 4 Pair 1 sa Receive Data A T25 5 O Pair 2 T23 Send Timing A T34 6 O Pair 3 T32 Send Data A T60 7
120. ble Design RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors 2 1 RJ11 3 2 4 a RJ11 5 4 RJ45 5 2 6 RJ11 3 7 4 8 RJ11 Standard RJ 45 Cable Pin Assignment Table 87 on page 192 shows the pin assignments of the standard RJ 45 cable Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 191 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 87 Standard RJ 45 Cable Pinout Details RJ 45 Pin Number Connections Tip 2 Ring 3 Tip 4 Tip 5 Ring 6 Ring 7 Tip 8 Ring Related l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 Documentation l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications The 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM requires a standard RJ 11 cable Figure 46 on page 193 shows the RJ 11 cable design 192 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Figure 46 RJ 11 Cabl
121. cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 95 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM Dir Output O and VHDCI 68 Pin DB 25 1 Pin DB 25 2 Pin Input 1 Description T37 1 Shield Ground TA 2 Receive Data A T16 3 O Send Data A T42 4 Clear to Send A T50 5 O Request to Send A T49 6 Terminal Ready A T51 7 Shield Ground T46 8 O Receive Ready A T7 15 O Send Timing A T4 17 O Terminal Timing A T8 18 Local Loopback 218 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 95 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output O and VHDCI 68 Pin DB 25 1 Pin DB 25 2 Pin Input 1 Description T45 20 Data Mode A T38 24 Receive Timing A T13 to T12 Protocol Identifier_O T52 Shield Ground T59 2 l Receive Data A T34 3 O Send Data A T60 4 Clear to Send A T68 5 O Request to Send A T67 6 O Terminal Ready A T55 7 Shield Ground T64 8 O Receive Ready A T25 15 O Send Timing A 22 17 O Terminal Timing A T26 18 Local Loopback T63 20 Data Mode A T56 24 Receive Timing A T31 to T30 Protocol Identifier_O Related EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documenta
122. cal Interface Module on page 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 77 on page 177 gives the RS 232 DTE cable pinouts Table 77 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 60 2 Transmit Data 1 3 Receive Data 48 4 Request to Send 37 5 Clear to Send 9 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 13 8 Data Carrier Detect Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 177 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 77 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 56 15 3 Transmit Clock 5 17 Receive Clock Al 18 Local Loopback 33 20 Data Terminal Ready 52 24 Terminal Clock 22 to 21 a 18 to 17 Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 e RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial
123. cards 0 Resource errors 0 Output errors Carrier transitions 1 Errors 0 Drops 0 MTU errors 0 Resource errors 0 Serial media information Line protocol eia530a Resync history Sync loss count 0 Data signal Rx Clock OK Control signals Local mode DCE To DTE CTS up DCD up DSR up From DTE DTR up RTS up DCE loopback override Off Clocking mode internal Loopback none Tx clock non invert Line encoding nrz Packet Forwarding Engine configuration Destination slot 4 CoS information Direction Output CoS transmit queue Bandwidth Buffer Priority Limit bps usec 0 best effort 95 7600000 95 0 low none 3 network control 5 400000 5 0 low none 4 Assign the interface an IP address edit user host set interfaces interface name unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone edit user host set security zones security zone zone name interfaces interface name host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options edit Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GPIM user host set security zones security zone zone name interfaces interface name host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies edit user host set security policies policy name 8 Port Seri 8 Port Seri 8 Port Seri 8 Port Seri 8 Port Seri 8 Po
124. cations ae Key features ientee aia iis deo LED States drsna NENNE Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc OVEINVIEW wii ehe nia diw eae eee 149 SDCCITICATIONS ies eigenen Saaiintn wala eae 15 E El ports Dual CTI El GPIMbeiscseeisie aa weeks 149 Quad CTIZE GRIM sesccsessssssessessessssessessesteseesessessens 157 RJ 48 cable PINOULS cceccescessssessessessstsstessssesteseeseees 167 E3 mode l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM uu 98 electrostatic discharge damage preventing 23 EX SFP FE20KT13R15 EX SFP FE20KT15R13 F FONT CONVENTIONS cccescessesessessessssssessesssssseesesseessseeseeseesessees xiv G GPIMs l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM uu 98 DACKDIANC es cesssesessescsseseseeseseessseesestseeseseseesteenees 6 98 149 COMPONEMMG csccscccsesesssetscseseseseteeeees 103 123 153 161 double high AOUDlE Wide ce ceeeeseseseseseeeseeeee 6 double high SINSlE WidE eee cseeesesseseeteseseeeseetee 6 Dal CTE ennes een 149 hardware specifications 98 120 151 159 NOt SWaPDabley iziccsscsecistettersacnsisesimniadientneracs 6 Quad CTIE lre ias 157 removing from services gateway 29 H hot swappable OPRIM Sise nee tere reer renee 6 l installing blank faceplateS s sssesserissrriserrserrrssrrssnrinrresrressrrenn 24 ORIM S eea E eeceereeceete 25 interface cable 8 Port Serial GPIM u ccescessssessessesesssseesessestestesesseeeees 124 interface modules 1 Port Clea
125. ces Gateway Interfaces e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements on page 11 e SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions on page 13 SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview A Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM is a network interface card NIC that installs in the front slots of the SRX550 or SRX650 Services Gateway to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The GPIM receives incoming packets from a network and transmits outgoing packets to a network These modules will complement the onboard Ethernet interfaces to extend the types and port counts of network connections for the LAN or WAN Interface module terminology GPIM Network interface card NIC that installs in a single high single wide GPIM front slots of the SRX550 Services Gateway and the SRX650 Services Gateway that have Gigabit connectivity to the system backplane XPIM 10 Gigabit Ethernet GPIM Can be installed SRX550 Services Gateway in the 10 Gigabit GPIM slot 3 or in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slot 6 on the front panel e SRX650 Services Gateway in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slots slots 2 and 6 on the front panel It can have one of the following configurations Single high single wide LAN switch GPIM that uses one slot e Double high single wide LAN switch GPIM that uses two standard slots vertically e Double high double wide LAN switch GPIM t
126. ces Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 83 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 59 9 60 Transmit Data B 47 10 48 Control B 2 1 1 Receive B 38 12 37 Indicate B 6 13 5 Signal Element Timing B 30 to 29 18 to 17 3 Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 e V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 Port G SHDSL Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications This topic includes the following sections e l Port G SHDS
127. channel 64 Kbps e Unframed clear channel Fractional framing e Superframe D4 SF G 04 Extended Superframe ESF e G704 with no CRC4 e G 03 Unframed HDLC Features Nx64KbpsorNx56 TI N 1to 24 E1 N 1 to 31 Kbps nonchannelized data rates CRC 16 32 16 32 Shared flag Supported Supported Idle flag fill Supported Supported Counters Runts Giants FCS Error Abort Runts Giants FCS Error Abort Error Align Error Error Align Error Related Dual CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 149 D mentation Speier e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 e Dual CT1 E GPIM LEDs on page 152 e Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications The Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the hardware specifications listed in Table 62 on page 152 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 151 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 62 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 78 in H x 6 72 in W x 8 1 in L 19 8 mm x 170 8 mm x 205 7 mm Weight 15 4 oz 0 44 kg Connector type RJ 45 Form factor Single high single wide GPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 104 F
128. col Identifier_2 T52 1 Shield Ground T59 2 l Pair 1 7 Receive Data A T34 3 O Pair 3 T32 Send Data A T60 4 Pair 4 T58 Clear to Send A T68 5 O Pair 5 T66 Request to Send A T67 6 O Terminal Ready A T18 7 Shield Ground T64 8 O Pair 6 T62 Receive Ready A T20 9 O Pair 7 T22 Terminal Timing B T62 10 O Pair 6 T64 Receiver Ready B T54 TI l Pair 8 T56 Receive Timing B 204 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 91 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T23 12 O Pair 2 25 Send Timing B T66 13 O Pair 5 T68 Request to Send B WS 14 l Pair 1 T59 Receive Data B T25 15 O Pair 2 T23 Send Timing A T32 16 O Pair 3 T34 Send Data B T22 17 O Pair 7 T20 Terminal Timing A T26 18 Local Loopback T58 19 l Pair 4 T60 Clear to Send B T63 20 Data Mode A T24 23 Shield Ground T56 24 Pair 8 T54 Receive Timing A T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier T53 to T52 Protocol Identifier_2 Related gt EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 ElIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial G
129. control signals In a basic serial setup the data circuit terminating equipment DCE is responsible for establishing maintaining and terminating a connection A modem is a typical DCE device A serial cable connects the DCE to a telephony network where ultimately a link is established with data terminal equipment DTE DTE is typically where a link terminates Figure 20 on page 67 shows the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM front panel Related l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter Documentation e l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter e l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc E ace Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 ace Module Supported Standards on page 68 E ace Module Key Features on page 69 E ace Module LEDs on page 69 67 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Related Documentation Table 27 on page 68 gives the physical specifications of the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Table 27 1 Port Serial Mini PIM Physical Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 8 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm Weight 3 04 oz 86 g Connector t
130. d i Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T37 A Shield Ground YE B Shield Ground T42 C l Clear to Send A 222 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 97 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 M34 1 M34 2 O and Pin Pin Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T50 D Request to Send A T49 E O Terminal Ready A T46 F Receive Ready A T45 H Data Mode A T8 KI l Local Loopback T4 P Pair 1 T39 Receive Data A T16 R Pair 2 T14 Send Data A T39 S l Pair 1 TA Receive Data B T14 IE O Pair 2 T16 Send Data B T38 U Pair 3 T36 Receive Timing A T4 V Pair 4 V2 Terminal Timing A T36 W Pair 3 T38 Receive Timing B T2 X Pair 4 T4 Terminal Timing B TZ Y O Pair 5 T5 Send Timing A Ve AA Pair 5 Wd Send Timing B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 223 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 97 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output VHDCI 68 M34 1 M34 2 O and i Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T13 to T12 Protocol Identifier _O Tllto TIS Protocol Identifier T52 A Shield Ground 155 B Shield Ground T60 C l Clear to Send
131. d click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any 4 To use the port on the XPIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide 136 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Using the CLI Related Documentation Chapter 14 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM To perform basic configuration for the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Assign the port an IP address set interfaces ge 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix e Assign MTU values set interfaces ge 1 0 0 unit O family inet mtu mtu values e Set link options set interfaces ge 1 0 0 gigether options auto negotiation Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic set security zone
132. d traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all See the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide for more details 1 Port DOCS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 41 e 1 Port DOCS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 42 nterface Module Supported Standards on page 43 e 1 Port DOCS S S e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physica S Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 44 S l Port DOCS page 43 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on 5 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 45 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 5 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Specifications on page 50 e l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interf Specifications on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interf Modules on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter Configuration on page 54 ace ace ace ace ace Module Overview on page 49 Module Hardware Module Network Interface Module Suppor
133. documents contact your sales representative Copies of the Management Information Bases MIBs available in a software release are included on the documentation CDs and at http www juniper net Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation You can send your comments to techpubs comments juniper net or fill out the documentation feedback form at http www juniper net techpubs docbug docbugreport html If you are using e mail be sure to include the following information with your comments Document name Document part number Page number Software release version not required for Network Operations Guides NOGs Requesting Technical Support Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC If you are a customer with an active J Care or JNASC support contract or are covered under warranty and need postsales technical support you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC JTAC policies For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies review the JTAC User Guide located at http www juniper net customers support downloads 710059 pdf Product warranties For product warranty information visit http www ju
134. e 119 e 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 e 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 e 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GPIM 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs Table 50 on page 123 lists the LEDs of the 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 50 8 Port Serial GPIM LED States LED Color State Description STATUS Green On GPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On GPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On GPIM has failed Off GPIM has no power and can be removed safely PO P7 Yellow On An alarm is present Green On Alarm is not present Related 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 Documentation 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Port Serial GPIM Components Table 51 on page 124 lists the components of the 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM
135. e 76 on page 176 gives the RS 232 DCE cable pinouts Table 76 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 1 2 Transmit Data 60 3 Receive Data 37 4 Request to Send 48 5 Clear to Send 35 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 13 8 Data Carrier Detect 56 15 Transmit Clock 52 17 Receive Clock 45 18 Local Loopback 9 20 Data Terminal Ready 5 24 Terminal Clock Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 76 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 22 to 21 Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 e V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physi
136. e Basic Configuration on page 78 The 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM has two LEDs located to the right of the socket Table 33 on page 78 describes the LED states Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 77 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 33 1 Port SFP Mini PIM LED States D Xo og State Description LINK Green On Port is online Off Port is offline ACT Green Blinking Port is receiving or sending data Off Port might be on but is not receiving or sending data e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 73 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 74 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 75 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 76 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 78 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration To enable the 1 Port Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure the properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of op
137. e GPIM straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the GPIM Figure 10 Installing a Double High Single Wide GPIM in an SRX650 Services Gateway 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver tighten the captive screws on each side of the GPIM faceplate Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 25 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 26 Related Documentation 5 Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the GPIM 6 If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points e Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop Use fasteners to maintain the shape of the cable loops After the STATUS LED light turns green and glows steadily on the GPIM is considered online and functioning normally See Figure 11 on page 26 and Table 11 on page 26 for hot swappable components and their descriptions NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Table 11 Hot Swappable Component Descriptions for GPIMs Number Component Description 1 STATUS LED The STATUS LED has the following indicator colors e Green and steadily on indicates that the GPIM is functioning normally Amber and steadily on indicates that the GPIM is start
138. e J Web Interface To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name at 1 0 0 and click Edit To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a b Select Configure gt Security gt Zones Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All e Protocols Allow All Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes To use the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a b Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any See the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide for more details Copyright
139. e J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces and click Help To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the l Port VDSL2 interface is installed on the device show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address set interfaces pt 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Zone set security zones security zone trust interfaces pt 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic options protocols set security zones security zone trust interfaces pt 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all See the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide for more details e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 9 e l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc PART 3 Gigabit Backpl
140. e Pinout for 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Al A2 A3 A4 Table 88 on page 193 shows the pin assignments of the RJ 11 cable Table 88 RJ 11 Cable Pinout Details for 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Pin Signal Al Ground A2 RX data input A3 Tx data output A4 Vcc power Related l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 Documentation l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 91 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications This topic includes the following sections ElIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 199 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 193 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e EIA e EIA EIA e EIA Module on page 210 Module on page 214 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical
141. e SRX550 Services Gateway ge 3 0 0 e SRX650 Services Gateway ge 2 0 0 NOTE When installing the 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM which uses 2 slots you must install it in the 10 Gigabit or 20 Gigabit GPIM slots e SRX550 Services Gateway Slot 3 for 10 Gigabit GPIM and slot 6 for 20 Gigabit GPIM e SRX650 Services Gateway Slots 2 and 6 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM e SRX550 Services Gateway ge 6 0 0 e SRX650 Services Gateway ge 2 0 0 NOTE When installing the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM which uses 4 slots you must install it in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slots e SRX550 Services Gateway Slot 6 e SRX650 Services Gateway Slots 2 and 6 14 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Table 10 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Port Number Examples continued Interface Type Interface Number Example 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM e SRX550 Services Gateway xe 3 0 0 e SRX650 Services Gateway xe 2 0 0 xe 2 0 1 or xe 6 0 0 xe 6 0 1 NOTE Represents two fiber and two copper ports user configured Must be installed in one of the following GPIM slots e SRX550 Services Gateway Slot 3 for 10 Gigabit GPIM and slot 6 for 20 Gigabit GPIM e SRX650 Services Gateway Slots 2 or 6 Dual CT1 E GPIM ctl 1 0 0 cel 1 0 0 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM ctl 1 0 0 cel 1 0 0 8 Port Serial GPIM se 1 0 0 to se 1 0 7 Relat
142. e and set the configuration for host inbound traffic services and protocols set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 3 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 3 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Using the CLI to Configure the CE1 Interface To perform basic configuration for the Dual CT1 E1 GPIM for the CE interface and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI NOTE You must configure the parent CE 1 interface before you can configure the child E1 interface Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 155 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 156 Related Documentation Verify that the Dual CT1 E GPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Configure the parent CE interface with no partitioning set interfaces cel 3 0 0 no partition interface type el Configure the child El interface and assign an IP address set interfaces el 3 0 0 unit O family inet address ip4 address prefix Assign MTU values to the child El interface set interfaces e1 3 0 0 unit O mtu mtu values Configure a security zone for the child El interface and set the configuration for host inbound traffic services and protocols set security zones
143. e on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 183 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 81 on page 184 describes the V 35 DTE cable pinouts Table 81 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground S B Signal Ground 48 C Request to Send 37 D Clear to Send 9 E Data Set Ready 15 IP Received Line Signal Detector 33 H Data Terminal Ready 4 K Test Mode 60 P 59 Transmit Data A 1 R 2 Receive Data A 59 5 60 Transmit Data B 2 T 1 Receive Data B 52 U 51 Terminal Timing A 5 V 6 Receive Timing A 51 W 52 Terminal Timing B 6 X 5 Receive Timing B 56 Y 55 Transmit Timing A 55 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 Z 18 to 17 184 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Related EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on Documentation page 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter
144. eae E acathe EA O 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface IMGGIUIE scar cine a6 haart a a wane E S a a Daioh ou a masa aes 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Nieo E E EE EE E ESET ara naan cn ed ey Gah Sere aoe Ow ae oe 186 Port G SHDSL Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications 187 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Wire Modes 00 cee eee eee 188 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment 189 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment 190 x Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Table of Contents Standard RJ 45 Cable Pin Assignment 0 0 00 00 cee eee 191 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable SDCCIICALIONS 6 ae sia caa anata dae eee aw a en adie Rue ao aek PR ee 192 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Cable SDECITICALONS sassis ae Stace duc a0 i a wl gad dk Si Ps sis paces gwar b wad acetal 193 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 6 ce eee tenn eee 194 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 2 6 ee eee eee nae 199 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module eee 202 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 1 eee eee eee 206 EIA
145. ed gt Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Documentation on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 e Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements on page 11 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 16 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway This chapter includes the following topics Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 17 Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 22 Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway This topic includes the following sections Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module on page 17 Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 18 e Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway
146. ee Figure 34 on page 134 Blinking Port is PoE enabled and receiving or sending data Figure 33 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM ss man mn n O ON O WS U e 16Gig aD Um Uw HH HD UD o YD ay Se ear eS pa T Sor ear e w f r LLL p or 7 W L saus E6 Aal foo fos Jo Lo Jos Joo sea ye XPIM ol dt i ae I a dd Figure 34 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE 9032725 XPIM or At Ga wor S oa wo Wo a T w TOT TOIT l mn p oT TH TTT i POE __LINKIACT 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 O L misl EL E E feet Je Lo a SE a ye One XPIM E 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 135 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 136 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 14 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM contains the components listed in Table 55 on page 135 Table 55 16 Port
147. elated Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module on page 17 D tati ae e Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 18 e Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 19 e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 21 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway This topic includes the following sections Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 22 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 23 Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Related Documentation 22 The following tools and p
148. eld Ground TA 2 Pair 1 T39 Receive Data A T16 3 O Pair 3 T14 Send Data A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 91 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T42 4 l Pair 4 T40 Clear to Send A T50 5 O Pair 5 T48 Request to Send A T49 6 Terminal Ready A T37 7 Shield Ground T46 8 O Pair 6 T44 Receive Ready A T2 9 O Pair 7 T4 Terminal Timing B T44 10 O Pair 6 T46 Receiver Ready B T36 T l Pair 8 T38 Receive Timing B mS 12 O Pair 2 WH Send Timing B T48 13 O Pair 5 T50 Request to Send B T39 14 l Pair 1 TA Receive Data B T7 15 O Pair 2 TS Send Timing A T14 16 O Pair 3 T16 Send Data B T4 17 O Pair 7 T2 Terminal Timing A T8 18 Local Loopback T40 19 Pair 4 T42 Clear to Send B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 203 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 91 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T45 20 l Data Mode A T51 23 Shield Ground T38 24 Pair 8 T36 Receive Timing A T1 to T15 Protocol Identifier T35 to T33 Proto
149. er over Ethernet PoE support The PoE GPIMs provide ports that supply electric power over the same ports that are used to connect network devices For more information about PoE see Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12 The 24 Port XPIM must be installed in specific GPIM slot groupings as shown in Table 56 on page 139 Table 56 Slot Groups for the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Device Slot Groups for the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SRX550 Top four standard slots slots 5 6 7 and 8 SRX650 Bottom four standard slots slots 1 2 3 and 4 and top four standard slots slots 5 6 7 and 8 The center GPIM slot bracket must be removed before installing a double high double wide GPIM See Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 for details Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 139 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Figure 35 on page 140 shows the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and Figure 36 on page 140 shows the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE Figure 35 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM
150. erface Module Operating Modes on page 60 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Modules Basic Configuration on page 64 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview Symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL also known as G SHDSL is part of the xDSL family of modem technologies that provide faster data transmission over a single flat untwisted or twisted pair of copper wires ITU T G 991 2 is the officially designated standard describing G SHDSL The G SHDSL interface on the SRX Series Services Gateways supports SHDSL for data transfer between a single customer premises equipment CPE subscriber and a central office CO The l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM supported on SRX Series devices provides the physical connection to DSL network media types Figure 19 on page 59 shows the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Figure 19 G SHDSL Mini PIM Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 59 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Ph
151. erfaces on page 12 SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions on page 13 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Overview Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs and Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules GPIMs are field replaceable network interface cards NICs supported on the Juniper Networks SRX Series Services Gateway for the branch You can easily insert or remove Mini PIMs and GPIMs from the front slots of the SRX Series Services Gateway chassis The Mini PIMs and GPIMs provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The Mini PIMs and GPIMs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the network During this process they perform framing and line speed signaling for the medium type The SRX Series Services Gateways run Junos OS A CAUTION The Mini PIMs available on the SRX Series Services Gateway are not hot swappable You must power off the device before removing or installing Mini PIMs NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 3 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 e SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 e Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7
152. es Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 19 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM LEDs States continued D Xo olg State Description UT Green Blinking The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM scans for a valid upstream DOCSIS channel to lock onto an Upstream upstream channel On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has locked onto the DOCSIS upstream channel LINK to CMTS Green Blinking The l Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has an active link with the CPE device but data communication is not taking place On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has an active link with the CPE device and data communication is taking place NOTE The Link LED does not blink for data traffic that originates or terminates at the cable modem ONLINE Green Blinking The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM is establishing a connection to the SRX Series device On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM is synchronized with the SRX Series device e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 41 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 42 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 43 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 44 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 43 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Min
153. essescssestssestscssesesesstsesseseeeeseess 133 with PoE 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COMPOMNEMNS ccesessesesesessesssseseseseseseseeseseseseseseeseseseesees 14 configuring With J WD cecscesesesseseseseseeeseeeeeeee 16 configuring with Point and Click CLI 16 configuring With the CLI seseseseseseeeseseesees 16 KEY feat rE Snina nna 110 LED states al OALA ALSA SFP AnNSCEVE S iiin i 15 SPECIFICATIONS siiin 111 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COMPONENT S srna anae ESen eres 43 configuring J Web sssessssrrerriesrirerrresrrrrnrssnrenrnnenrnss 46 configuring with the CLl s ssssssssereresrreerrrerrreerresenrsss 46 KEY featyrE Siriatik iassa eindanna 140 CED St t S inniinn na 142 OVEIVIGW eiiis s nasa ranira E EEE ENE i 39 SIE fe DEIN S 145 specifications E WIE OB reien A 8 Port Serial GPIM basic CONfigUratiOn sss sesserrisserssrrrssrrssrrserrreerrrerrresrn 126 COMPONEN S eee inngeecuicevecscnetedadvindneadecesves 123 EIA 449 cable DCE nrsdrusnansamneznunsi 125 EIA 449 cable DT E eminim anash 125 EIA 530 cable DCE 125 EIA 530 cable DTE iiini 125 EIA 530A Cable DCE cccscscssesesesteseesessesteseesees 125 EJA 530A cable DTE Jaminia 125 interface CADIS sinisiin 124 interface SpecificationS seeseiesrreerrrerrrrerrreerrernres 121 key feat e Srni an 122 242 LIED States nrinn a 23 OVEIVIEW senenin nnn a ARa R E 119 RS 232 cable DCE ininiinnnsnsa n 25 RS 232 cable DTE Jasnu 25 s
154. face Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 178 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 e X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 82 on page 185 gives the X 21 DCE cable pinouts Table 82 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 37 3 38 Control A 60 4 59 Receive A 48 5 47 Indicate A 52 6 51 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground 2 9 1 Transmit Data B 38 10 37 Control B 59 1 60 Receive B 47 12 48 Indicate B 51 13 Bz Signal Element Timing B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 185 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 82 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 30 to 29
155. figure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 86 Using the CLI on page 87 Using the J Web Interface 86 To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name tl 1 0 0 or e1 1 0 0 and click Edit To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 9 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module c For host inbound traffic set the following e System Services Allow All e Protocols Allow All d Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any 4 Touse the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Conf
156. gabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 136 e Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the following key features 16 triple speed 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports double high card PoE support for all ports PCI Express interface for control and management e I2C interface for module monitor and identification Maximum module power of 40 0 W without PoE JTAG support for boundary scan test Related 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 eacementann 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 135 132 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 14 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 136 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the specifications listed in Table 53 on page 133 Table 53 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 1 58 in H x 6 72 in W x 8 5in L 4 0 cm x 17 1 cm x 21 6 cm Weight 16 5 oz 0 68 kg Connector type 16 RJ 45 Form factor Double high single wide XPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F
157. gure 7 Installing a Mini PIM in an SRX Series Services Gateway 031028 N 10 Captive Screws Using a 1 8 in 3 mm flat blade screwdriver tighten the screws on each side of the Mini PIM faceplate Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the Mini PIM If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points e Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight as they hang to the floor Place any excess cables out of the way in neatly coiled loops e Use fasteners to maintain the shape of the cable loops 10 Reconnect the power adapter to the device Verify that the Power LED glows steadily T Related Documentation green after you press the power button Verify that the Mini PIM LED on the system dashboard glows steadily green to confirm that the Mini PIM is online Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module on page 17 Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 20 Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 18 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway A CAUTION The Mini PIMs available on the SRX Series Services Gateway are 20 not hot swappable You must power off the
158. h 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 11 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Table 40 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications continued Description Value Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Altitude Up to 10 000 ft 3 000 m Related l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Overview on page 97 Documentation l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 99 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Key Features on page 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM LEDs on page 102 e l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Components on page 103 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 104 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 105 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications The 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the network interface specifications for DS3 or E3 modes listed in Table 41 on page 99 Table 41 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications Description DS3 Mode E3 Mode Network Interface Specifications a Line encoding B3ZS HDB3 Framing e M23 default G 751 default e C bit Substrate and Vendor algorithms supported Vendor algorithms supported
159. h Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Figure 14 ADSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Front Panel Related l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Documentation l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 35 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 37 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 37 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 38 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 14 on page 34 gives the physical specifications of the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Table 14 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 3 75 in x 5 9 in x 0 80 in 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm x 2 0 cm Weight 2 72 oz 77 g Connector type RJ 11 Form factor Mini PIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F 0 C through 40 C 34 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 3 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Table 14 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM Specifications continued Description Value Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Rela
160. han the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any To use the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI Verify that the serial interface is installed on the device show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 7 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 72 Related Documentation set interfaces se 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefi
161. hat uses two standard slots vertically and two standard slots horizontally NOTE Wheninstalling the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM which uses four slots you must install it in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slots SRX550 Services Gateway Slot 6 among the top four standard slots slots 5 through 8 SRX650 Services Gateway Slot 2 among the bottom four standard slots slots 1 through 4 and slot 6 among the top four standard slots slots 5 through 8 Table 4 on page 6 lists the GPIMs and XPIMs and their respective model numbers Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 5 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 4 SRX Series Services Gateway GPIM and XPIM Model Numbers GPIM or XPIM Model Number Dual CT1 E GPIM SRX GP DUAL T1 E1 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM SRX GP QUAD T1 E1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM SRX GP 1DS3 E3 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SRX GP 2XE SFPP TX 8 Port Serial GPIM SRX GP 8SERIAL 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SRX GP 16GE 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE SRX GP 16GE POE 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SRX GP 24GE 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE SRX GP 24GE POE Figure 1 on page 6 shows how the slots on the front panel of the SRX550 Services Gateway are numbered Slots 1 and 2 are for Mini PIMs and slots 3 through 8 are for GPIMs Figure 1 SRX550 Services Gateway Slot Numbers SIH E mF 0 x O F O gos os LLLE t T x e
162. i Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 46 To enable the Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI Using the J Web Interface on page 47 Using the CLI on page 47 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 4 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Using the J Web Interface Using the CLI To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name cm 1 0 0 and click Edit To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All P
163. ica Mini Physica Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Interface Module Key Features on page 84 Interface Module LEDs on page 84 81 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Related Documentation Table 34 on page 82 gives the physical specifications of the 1 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Table 34 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM Physical Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 80 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm Weight 2 88 oz 82 g Connector type RJ 48 Form factor Mini PIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F 0 C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Port T1 E Mini Physical Port T1 E1 Mini Physica 5 to 90 noncondensing Interface Module Overview on page 81 Interface Module Network Interface
164. ical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 94 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T52 1 Shield Ground T34 2 O Pair 1 Ws Send Data A T59 3 I Pair 2 TS7 Receive Data A T68 4 Pair 3 T66 Request to Send A T60 5 l Pair 4 T58 Clear to Send A T63 6 Pair 5 T l Data Mode A T61 22 l Pair 5 T63 Data Mode B T18 m Shield Ground T64 8 Pair 6 T62 Receiver Ready A T54 9 Pair 7 T56 Receive Timing B T62 10 l Pair 6 T64 Receiver Ready B T20 ll Pair 8 T22 Terminal Timing B T23 12 l Pair 9 T25 Send Timing B T58 13 Pair 4 T60 Clear to Send B T32 14 O Pair 1 T34 Send Data B 125 15 Pair 9 m23 Send Timing A 216 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 94 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T57 16 Pair 2 T59 Receive Data B T56 17 Pair 7 T54 Receive Timing A T28 18 O Local Loopback T66 19 Pair 3 T68 Request to Send B T67 20 O Pair 10 T65 Terminal Ready A T65 23 Pair 10 T67 Terminal Ready B T22 24 O Pair 8 T20 Terminal Timing A T31 to T27 Protocol Identifier_O T53 to T52 Protocol Identifier_2 T
165. ices Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements on page 11 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules Table 7 on page 10 lists maximum transmission unit MTU values for the SRX Series Services Gateways Physical Interface Modules PIMs Table 7 MTU Values for the SRX Series Services Gateways PIMs Physical Logical Interface MTU Interface MTU Default MTU Maximum MTU Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 1 Port Gigabit 1514 1500 1514 9010 Ethernet small form factor pluggable SFP Mini PIM 1 Port small 1514 1500 1514 1518 form factor pluggable SFP Mini PIM ADSL2 1496 1456 1496 1512 Mini PIM DOCSIS 1504 1500 1504 1504 Mini PIM G SHDSL 1496 1468 1496 4482 Mini PIM Serial Mini PIM 1504 1500 1504 2000 T1 E1 Mini PIM 1504 1500 1504 2000 VDSL2 Mini PIM 1496 1482 1496 1496 Dual CT1 E1 1504 1500 1504 9000 GPIM Quad CT1 E1 1504 1500 1504 9000 GPIM 8 Port Serial 1504 1500 1504 9192 GPIM 10 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Table 7 MTU Values for the SRX Series Services Gateways PIMs continued Physical Logical Interface MTU Interface M
166. ices gateway using the J Web interface 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured 2 To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name pt 1 0 0 and click Edit 3 To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes 4 Touse the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 93 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Using the CLI Related Documentation 94 c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For more information in th
167. ield Ground T59 2 l Pair 1 T57 Receive Data A T60 3 Pair 2 ais Clear to Send A T34 4 O Pair 3 T32 Send Data A T68 5 Pair 4 T66 Request to Send A T22 6 O Pair 5 T20 Terminal Timing A 55 8 Shield Ground T57 9 l Pair 1 T59 Receive Data B 230 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 99 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output i e and VHDCI 68 DB 15 1 1B o Input Pin 1 Pairing Description T58 10 Pair 2 T60 Clear to Send B T32 Ti O Pair 3 T34 Send Data B T66 12 O Pair 4 T68 Request to Send B T20 13 O Pair 5 T22 Terminal Timing B 5S to aZ Protocol Identifier_2 Related EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Seria
168. igabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 205 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 92 on page 206 gives the EIA 530A DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 92 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM Dir Output VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 O and Pin Pin Pin Input 1 Pairing Description T33 1 Shield Ground T16 2 O Pair 1 T14
169. igure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Using the CLI To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM for the T1 interface and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the T1 E interface is installed on the device show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address For T1 interfaces set interfaces t1 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix For El interfaces set interfaces el 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust For T1 interfaces set security zones security zone trust interfaces tl 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all For El interfaces set security zones security zone trust interfaces el 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options For T1 interfaces Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 87 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 88 Related Documentation e l Port T1 E1M e l
170. im TAeICIs wars cesar wasn sede na Ee toate tances aaaemanes wba e 94 Part 3 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Supported on the SRX Series Services Gateway Chapter 11 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM 0 00 ccc eee eee ee ees 97 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM OvervieW 1 eee 97 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Hardware Specifications 98 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications 99 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Standards 101 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Key FeatureS 0 0 0 0 ee eee 101 l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIMLEDs 0 0000 cc cece eee eens 102 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM ComponentS 0 000 eee eee eee 103 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Supported Loopback Diagnostics 104 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Basic Configuration 105 Usingsthe Culii2s actebhend cabomew nse Poon ee eeteedsahersdneasaand 105 Chapter 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 0 ccc cece eee eee ees 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 110 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications 5 111 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIMLEDS 0 0 0 0 0 cc eee 13 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components rauan eee ee eee ee 114 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configur
171. imum Supported Junos OS Release SRX210 SRX220 SRX240 SRX550 G SHDSL Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 10 0 10 3 Release 10 0 Release 12 1 Serial Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 9 5 10 3 Release 9 5 Release 12 1 T1 E1 Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 9 4 10 3 Release 9 4 Release 12 1 VDSL2 Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 10 1 10 3 Release 10 1 Release 12 1 Table 6 on page 9 shows the types of Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules GPIMs and XPIMs along with the SRX Series Services Gateways and the Junos OS Releases that support them Table 6 GPIM and XPIM Types and Hardware Platform Compatibility Supported Platforms and Minimum Supported Junos OS Release GPIMs Dual CT1 E1 Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 1 9 5 Quad CT1 E1 Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1 9 5 l Port Clear Channel Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1 DS3 E3 11 1 8 Port Serial Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1R2 12 1R2 XPIMs 10 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1 Gigabit Ethernet 9 5 GPIM 24 Port Gigabit Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1 Ethernet 9 5 2 Port 10 Gigabit Junos OS Release Junos OS Release 12 1 Ethernet 10 2 Related SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 Documentation Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 9 SRX Series Serv
172. in Pin Pairing Description T33 1 Shield Ground TA 2 l Pair 1 T39 Receive Data A T16 3 O Pair 2 T14 Send Data A T42 4 Pair 3 T40 Clear to Send A T50 5 O Pair 4 T48 Request to Send A T49 6 O Pair 5 T47 Terminal Ready A T47 22 Pair 5 T49 Terminal Ready B T37 7 Shield Ground T46 8 O Pair 6 T44 Receive Ready A T2 9 O Pair 7 T4 Terminal Timing B 210 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 93 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T44 10 O Pair 6 T46 Receiver Ready B T36 T Pair 8 T38 Receive Timing B T5 12 O Pair 9 TZ Send Timing B T48 13 O Pair 4 150 Request to Send B T39 14 l Pair 1 T4 Receive Data B T 15 O Pair 9 VS Send Timing A T14 16 O Pair 2 T16 Send Data B T4 17 Pair 7 T2 Terminal Timing A T8 18 Local Loopback T40 19 Pair 3 T42 Clear to Send B T45 20 Pair 10 T43 Data Mode A T43 23 Pair 10 T45 Terminal Ready B T38 24 l Pair 8 T36 Receive Timing A T13 to T15 Protocol Identifier_O T35 to T33 Protocol Identifier_2 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 211 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 93 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Seri
173. ing up running diagnostics or going offline e Red and steadily on indicates that the GPIM has failed e Off indicates that the GPIM is not powered on is offline or is not configured 2 ONLINE OFFLINE NOTE You are not required to press this button when button installing a GPIM The services gateway automatically recognizes when a GPIM has been inserted into its slots Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 e Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 22 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Series Services Gateway Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway A CAUTION Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Ensure that the GPIM is installed in the appropriate GPIM slot For more information about the appropriate GPIM slots see SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 The SRX550 and SRX650 Services Gateway chassis can hold interface modules that use four standard Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM slots each These GPIMs must be installed in specific groups of four standard slots as shown in Table 12 on page 27 D NOTE Installing a GPIM on the SRX550 Services G
174. inouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module 202 Table 91 on page 202 gives the EIA 530A DCE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 91 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin Pairing Description T33 1 7 Shi
175. ire G NOTE The 4 wire mode is the default operating mode for the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM The 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM can operate in any of the following annexes Annex A Annex B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 6 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Annex F Annex G NOTE All the annexes supported on the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM can operate in 2 wire 4 wire and 8 wire modes Table 24 on page 61 lists the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM data rates for the different operating modes Table 24 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Data Rates Annexes Operating Modes Data Rates Mbps Annex A and Annex B 2 wire 4 port 2 wire 2 3 maximum 4 wire 2 port 4 wire 4 6 maximum 8 wire 1 port 8 wire 9 2 maximum Annex F and Annex G 2 wire 4 port 2 wire 0 768 to 5 696 4 wire 2 port 4 wire 1 536 to 11 392 8 wire 1 port 8 wire 3 072 to 22 784 Related l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 Documentation e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Feature
176. itW he ares ok ove ae oe 6Ssodn abode vena ieee EE 157 Quad CT1 E GPIM Key FeatureS 0 0 eee nee 158 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications 0 0 eee 159 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications 0 0 00 cee eee eee 159 Quad GT 7El GPIMMBEDS 4 24 d rs acacia dees beng 6a s Ow kee ow eens aie 160 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc ix SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Q ad CrIEl GPIM GOmpOnentS ira sense seraa enie r eave maae Saeed 161 Quad CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration serae crei derti eee 161 Using the J Web Interface 2 eee eee 162 Using the CLI to Configure the CTI Interface 0 0 cee eee 163 Using the CLI to Configure the CE Interface 0 eee 163 Part 4 Appendixes Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector PINOUES eaaa eatae chedirwgris ier icdoratnd tian ences 167 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications 167 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 0 0 cee eee 167 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port TI E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 0 0 ccc 168 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 1 6 eee 169 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Cro
177. ity zones security zone trust interfaces at 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic options protocols set security zones security zone trust interfaces at 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all See the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide for more details Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 65 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 66 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 7 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics e l Port Seria l Port Seria l Port Seria l Port Seria e l Port Seria e l Port Seria l Port Seria M M M M M M M ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi ini Physi cal cal cal cal cal cal cal nter nter nter nter nter nter nter ace Module Overview on page 67 if ace Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 ace Module Supported Standards on page 68 E ace Module Key Features on page 69 ace Module LEDs on page 69 ace Module Interface Cables on page 69 E ace Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview Serial WAN links are bidirectional links and require very few
178. ive Italic text like this e Introduces or emphasizes important e A policy term is a named structure new terms that defines match conditions and Identifies book names actions Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles UN0SOS System Basics Configuration Guide e RFC1997 BGP Communities Attribute Italic text like this Represents variables options for which Configure the machine s domain name you substitute a value in commands or configuration statements edit root set system domain name domain name Text like this Represents names of configuration e To configure a stub area include the statements commands files and directories configuration hierarchy levels or labels on routing platform components stub statement at the edit protocols ospf area area id hierarchy level e The console port is labeled CONSOLE lt gt angle brackets Enclose optional keywords or variables stub lt default metric metric gt Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Table 2 Text and Syntax Conventions continued Convention pipe symbol Description Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity About This Guide Examples broadcast multicast string string2 string3 pound sign Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration st
179. kplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway Related Documentation To maintain proper airflow through the services gateway leave blank faceplates in place over slots that do not contain Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules GPIMs Do not remove a blank faceplate unless you are installing a GPIM in the empty slot To remove a blank faceplate 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen the captive screws on each side of the blank faceplate 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver gently pry out one side of the faceplate and pull it off ED NOTE When installing a blank GPIM faceplate make sure that the padded side of the faceplate is facing up e Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 e Installing a Double High Double Wide Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 27 Removing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 28 e Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 22 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway 24 NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Ensure that the GPIM is installed in the appropriate GPIM slot For more information about the appropriate GPIM slots see SRX
180. l DS3 E3 GPIM 22 89 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 20 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 4O without PoE 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 4O without PoE e SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 e SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 e Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 7 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 e SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions on page 13 Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power over Ethernet PoE supports the implementation of the IEEE 802 3 af and IEEE 802 3 at standards which allow both data and electric power to pass over a copper Ethernet LAN cable The SRX550 and SRX650 Services Gateways provide PoE ports which supply electric power over the same ports that are used for connecting network devices PoE ports allow you to plug in devices that require both network connectivity and electric power such as voice over IP VoIP and IP phones and wireless access points The PoE ports for the SRX550 and SRX650 Services Gateway reside on the individual XPIMs The services gateway supports the following XPIMs with PoE 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM The active Services and Routing Engine SRE manages the overall system PoE power You can configure the services gate
181. l Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 e V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 231 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 100 on page 232 gives the X 21 DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM NOTE For X 21 protocol even if the cable is not connected to the other end the LED status will show green Table 100 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 15 1 DB 15 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T37 1 Shield Ground T16 2 O Pair 1 T14 Send Data A T50 3 O Pair 2 T48 Request to Send A TA 4 Pair 3 T39 Receive Data A T42 5 l Pair 4 T40 Clear to Send A T38 6 Pair 5 T36 Receive Timing A T51 8 Shield Ground 714 9 O Pair 1 T16 Send Data B T48 10 O Pair 2 T50 Request to Send B T39 1 l Pair 3 T4 Receive Data B T40 12 l Pair 4 T4
182. l Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 72 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 74 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 77 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Modu e on page 178 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module 182 Table 80 on page 182 gives the V 35 DCE cable pinouts Table 80 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground S B Signal Ground 37 C Request to Send 48 D Clear to Send 33 E Data Set Ready 13 F Received Line Signal Detector 9 H Data Terminal Ready 45 K Test Mode 1 P 2
183. l Number Label 236 SRX Series Services Gateway GPIM Serial Number Label 236 Information You Might Need to Supply toJTAC 0 0 0 eee 237 Contacting Customer SUPO eases stared eavn a wed se Hae eaedaeaas 237 Packing the Hardware Components for Shipment n assas aaan ra annaa 238 Part 5 Index INGEX moresca cote nears saber e eed woe sa eehe a cede ada abetawe eet aaa 24 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc xi SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide xii Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc About This Guide e Objectives on page xiii Audience on page xiii Documentation Conventions on page xiii e SRX Series Documentation and Release Notes on page xv Obtaining Documentation on page xv Documentation Feedback on page xvi Requesting Technical Support on page xvi Objectives This guide describes hardware components and installation basic configuration and basic troubleshooting procedures for the Juniper Networks SRX Series Services Gateway interfaces It explains how to prepare your site for services gateway installation unpack and install the hardware power on the services gateway perform initial software configuration and perform routine maintenance After completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this guide see the Junos OS configuration guides for information about further Junos OS configuratio
184. l and remote loopback diagnostics Configurable clock rate for the transmit TX clock and receive RX clock Complete configuration and management by using the CLI and the J Web interface Related l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 D mentation eae l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 Ya l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 68 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 69 E l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs The 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has one LED located to the right of the serial port Table 28 on page 69 describes the LED states Table 28 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LED States Name Color State Description STATUS Green On Online with no alarms or failures Off Device has detected a failure Related l Port Seria Documentation ini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 e l Port Seria i ini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 a ace Module Supported Standards on page 68 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 69 M M l Port Serial Mini Physical Inter M M
185. le SRX CBL X21 DCE 2 X 21 cable DCE L Female SRX CBL EIA530 DTE 2 EIA 530 cable DTE M Male SRX CBL EIA530 DCE 2 EIA 530 cable DCE N Female Figure 30 on page 125 shows the cables with name A and B at the serial connector end Label A refers to port O port 2 port 4 or port 6 and label B refers to port 1 port 3 port 5 or port 7 depending on which port the cable is connected Figure 30 Example of a Cable Numbering g021286 Related 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 pocUmentANoN 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 125 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 8 Port Seria 8 Port Seria 8 Port Seria 8 Port Seria e 8 Port Seria GP GP GP GP GP M Components on page 123 M Key Features on page 122 M LEDs on page 123 M Network Interface Specifications on page 121 M Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration 126 The 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM is a network interface card NIC that installs in the front slots of the SRX650 and SRX550 Services Gateways to provide physical connections to a WAN After you install the GPIM in the services gateway you configure a network interface on the GPIM D NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable function
186. le 90 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T17 1 Shield Ground T16 4 O Pair 1 T14 Send Data A T7 5 Pair 1 TS Send Timing A T41 6 Pair 3 T39 Receive Data A T50 7 O Pair 4 T48 Request to Send A T38 8 Pair 5 T36 Receive Timing A T42 9 Pair 6 T40 Clear to Send A T10 10 Local Loopback T45 1 Pair 7 T43 Data Mode A T49 12 O Pair 8 T47 Terminal Ready A T46 13 l Pair 9 T44 Receive Ready A T4 17 O Pair 10 T2 Terminal Timing A T33 19 Shield Ground Way 20 Shield Ground T14 22 O Pair 1 T16 Send Data B iis 23 Pair 2 WH Send Timing B Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 199 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 90 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued VHDCI 68 DB 37 1 DB 37 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T39 24 Pair 3 TA Send Data B T48 25 Pair 4 T50 Request to Send B T36 26 Pair 5 T38 Receive Timing B T40 27 Pair 6 T42 Clear to Send B T43 29 Pair 7 T45 Data Mode B T47 30 O Pair 8 T49 Terminal Ready B T44 31 Pair 9 T46 Receiver Ready B I2 35 O Pair 10 T4 Terminal Timing B T51 37 Shield Ground TII to T15 Protocol Identifier _1 TI to T3 Protocol Mode T52 Shield
187. lear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware root srx650r03 gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis AJ2210AA0064 SRX650 Midplane REV 09 710 023875 AABIJ4077 System IO REV 08 710 023209 AABK2897 SRXSME System IO Routing Engine REV 18 750 023223 AABIJ8853 RE SRXSME SRE6 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC FPC 2 REV 03 750 023873 TV4286 FPC 105 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 106 FPC 5 REV 10 750 023810 AABE1433 FPC FPC 6 REV 10 750 023808 AAAJ9355 FPC PIC 0 4x CT1E1 gPIM FPC 7 REV 10 750 023808 AAAVO0753 FPC FPC 8 REV 09 750 023810 AAAC6572 FPC PIC 0 1x CLR CH T3 E3 Power Supply 0 Rev 03 740 024283 UEO5105 PS 645W AC Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc root srx650r03 gt show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online O CPU less FPC 1 Empty 2 Not Usable 2 Offline FPC configured offline 3 Empty 2 Not Usable 4 Empty w Not Usable 5 Offline FPC configured offline 6 Online 0 0 128 14 41 7 Offline FPC configured offline 8 Online o 0 1
188. lectrostatic bags e Write the Return Materials Authorization RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking A CAUTION Do not stack any of the services gateway components during packing Related Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 D tati ocumentaton e Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 e Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC on page 237 238 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc PART 5 Index Index on page 241 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 239 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 240 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc OVEIVI CW hiis inaipa eiei ri aiin 59 supported standardS s seessesessserserreerrrsrrrerrrerrrrern 60 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM ceeeeee 49 hardware SPeCifICAtIONS c cece teesesteseeeeeeeeees 50 key features nN ex E e EEDS ameo ss sussetv eee eee aceon eee eee network interface SPECIFICATIONS cece 51 Symbols OVENI E Waada a E teenie 49 comments in configuration statements xy supported modules E ERENER TETEE T 51 in syntax descriptions l Port Serial MiINi PIM cccssessessesessessessesccsessesssteseesseseeeees 67 1 Port ADSL2 MINi PIM cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscssseseccececsce basic
189. lly you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes To use the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For more information in the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces and click Help Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 6 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Using the CLI To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the G SHDSL interface is installed on the device show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address set interfaces at 1 0 0 unit O family inet address Interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust set secur
190. ly SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Location Description RightsideoftheGPIM Use the GPIM ONLINE OFFLINE button to gracefully shut down the GPIM Two fixed T1 E1 ports labeled O and 1 Each port can be configured using the CLI in T1 or El mode Middle of the GPIM TI Mode e Transmit bit rate 1 544 Mbps e Receive bit rate 1 544 Mbps El Mode e Transmit bit rate 2 048 Mbps e Receive bit rate 2 048 Mbps Captive screws One on each side of the GPIM Use the captive screws to hold the GPIM in place in the services gateway Related Documentation o 0 g Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Overview on page 149 ual CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs on page 152 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 ual CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 ual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 ual CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 To enable the Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM installed on your SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 153 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently
191. n Audience This guide is designed for network administrators who are installing and maintaining Juniper Networks SRX Series Services Gateway interfaces or preparing a site for device installation To use this guide you need a broad understanding of networks and the Internet networking principles and network configuration Any detailed discussion of these concepts is beyond the scope of this guide Documentation Conventions Table 1 on page xiv defines the notice icons used in this guide Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc xiii SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 1 Notice Icons Icon Meaning Informational note Description Indicates important features or instructions Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death Laser warning A A s Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser Table 2 on page xiv defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide Table 2 Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Bold text like this Description Represents text that you type Examples To enter configuration mode type theconfigure command user host gt configure Fixed width text like this Represents output that appears on the terminal screen user host gt show chassis alarms No alarms currently act
192. n the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings NOTE The configuration settings given in the following steps are an example The actual configuration settings might vary depending on your requirements a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones Screens b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following e Services telnet Protocols ospf d Click OK and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any 4 Touse the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action from zone trust to zone trust c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Using the CLI To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 55 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 56 D NOTE The configuration settings given in the following steps are an example The actual configuration settings might vary depending on your requiremen
193. ne Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 209 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 93 on page 210 gives the EIA 530 DCE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 93 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 25 1 DB 25 2 Pin P
194. ne Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features The Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the following common key features for both T1 and El modes Related Documentation 150 Channel service unit data service unit CSU DSU to eliminate the need for a separate external device 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps operating modes Independent internal and external clocking option Alarm reporting with a 24 hour history maintained Loopback local and remote and BERT PRBS diagnostics Multilink Frame Relay and Multilink PPP support MTU size of 9000 bytes maximum Dual CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 149 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E 1 GPIM LEDs on page 152 Dual CT1 E GPIM Components on page 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 153 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 16 Dual CT1 E GPIM Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications The Dual CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the network interface specifications specific to T1 or El modes listed in Table 61 on page 151 Table 61 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications Description Tl Mode E1 Mode Network Interface Specifications AMI B8ZS HDB3 Line encoding Mode Framed clear channel e Framed clear
195. net XPIM e 8 Port Serial GPIM 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM with PoE Related Documentation SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 4 SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview on page 5 e SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility on page 8 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility Table 5 on page 8 shows the types of Mini Physical Interface Modules Mini PIMs with the SRX Series devices and the Junos OS releases that support them Table 5 Mini PIM Types and Hardware Platform Compatibility Supported Platforms and Minimum Supported Junos OS Release SRX210 SRX220 SRX240 SRX550 1 Port Small Junos OS Release Not Supported Junos OS Not Supported Form Factor 9 4 Release 9 4 Pluggable SFP 1 Port Gigabit JunosOS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS Ethernet 10 4 10 4 Release 10 4 Release 12 1 Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP ADSL2 Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 9 5 10 3 Release 9 5 Release 12 1 DOCSIS Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Junos OS Junos OS 10 1 10 3 Release 10 1 Release 12 1 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Table 5 Mini PIM Types and Hardware Platform Compatibility continued Supported Platforms and Min
196. nges and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide To perform basic configuration for the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Assign the port an IP address set interfaces xe 6 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 117 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 118 Related Documentation D NOTE The interface xe 6 0 0 is the correct configuration if the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is installed in slot 6 If the 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is installed in slot 2 valid only on SRX650 then the correct interface configuration would be xe 2 0 0 Assign MTU values set interfaces xe 6 0 0 unit O family inet mtu mtu values Set link options set interfaces xe 6 0 0 gigether options802 3ad auto negotiation loopback Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces xe 6 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic set sec
197. ni Physical Interface Module on page 169 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 170 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Table 71 on page 169 gives RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector straight pinouts Table 71 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Mini PIM Form RX Ring lt gt RX Ring 2 3 RX Tip lt gt RX Tip 4 9 TX Ring lt gt TX Ring 5 1 TX Tip lt gt TX Tip 3 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground 7 No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect 9 No connect No connect Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 169 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 71 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts continued RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Mini PIM Form 10 No connect No connect 1 No connect No connect 12 No connect No connect 13 No connect No connect 14 No connect No connect 15 No connect No connect Related gt RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Documentation Mini Physical Interface Module on page 1
198. niper net support warranty JTAC Hours of Operation The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year Self Help Online Tools and Resources For quick and easy problem resolution Juniper Networks has designed an online self service portal called the Customer Support Center CSC that provides you with the following features Find CSC offerings http www juniper net customers support Find product documentation http www juniper net techpubs Download the latest versions of software and review release notes http www juniper net customers csc software Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base http kb juniper net e Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications https www juniper net alerts xvi Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc About This Guide Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum http www juniper net company communities Open a case online in the CSC Case Manager http www juniper net cm To verify service entitlement by product serial number use our Serial Number Entitlement SNE Tool located at https tools juniper net SerialNumberEntitlementSearch Opening a Case with JTAC You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone Use the Case Manager tool in the CSC at http www juniper net cm Call 1 888 314 JTAC 1 888 314 5822 toll free in the USA C
199. nouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 97 on page 222 gives the V 35 DCE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 97 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM Dir Output VHDCI 68 M34 1 M34 2 O an
200. nrosnerenere 4 removing blank faceplates 24 removing GPIMS ccccscscsssssssesesesesesesesescscssscseseseeeees return procedure SFP trAnSCe iverS cssesssscsssscsssssessssesssesessssesessesssassseees SFP GEIOKT V3 R14 isccccsiscssssnsesscccatsssacecstssescessszsecesstianasantdiccees SFP GEIOKTI3BR15 cccssssessessssesessesssesesssecsssssanssseestsesensesesees SFP GETOKTI4RISB sscccesscsssessssessesssessesssesssssssnsssessnsesensssesens SFP GEIOKTISRIS scsesscsssessssssecsessssnsssessesessessseressesnsnseeseees SFP GEAOKTISR ID vcsecssscevcasspeescsesesassrar iter acciessa cuteness SFP GE4OKTI5RIS3 SFPP lIOGE ER sssssssssssessssesessescssssesessnsssseansesesssnssnssseeassass SFPP lTOGE LR ccccsssssssssssesessesssessnsessesesessessssnensesansssessesesees SFPP 1OGE LRM s ssssssssesessesssessssessesssessesesnessessnsessnsssasess SPP P OGE S Riesisnssecsrserccueisaesersinaimis neetaces SRX SFP 1GE LH esesessesscsssssessssssssesecsssessesesesseseesseeesaeseees SRX SFP 1GE LX SRX SFP 1GE SX SRX SEP GERI esescesssscssssrseassscsciscannaaanesnaainnsies SRX SFP FE PX sssssesssssssssesessesssessnsssecsnsesansesnesnsesnsssesansees support requesting from JTAC ccsescsseseseeeseeesees 237 SYNTAX CONVENTIONS cccccecesssessssecescsssesecseseseseesscsssessseeesees xiV T TI ports Dual CTI E GPIM seesceessessessssessessesssesseesssseseeseeseesees 149 Quad CTE WGP IM naasian 157 RJ
201. nterface Module Key Features on page 53 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 54 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 54 To enable the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure the properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a variety of other options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 55 Using the CLI on page 55 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 5 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Using the J Web Interface To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page is displayed and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if the device is configured 2 To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name and click Edit 3 To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assig
202. o assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following System Services Allow All Protocols Allow All d Click OK and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any 4 To use the port on the XPIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide 146 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Using the CLI To perform basic configuration for the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Assign the port an IP address set interfaces ge 2 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix e Assign MTU values set interfaces ge 2 0 0 unit O family inet mtu mtu values e
203. ocedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 e Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC on page 237 Contacting Customer Support on page 237 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix B Contacting Customer Support and Returning SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC If you are returning a hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement obtain a Return Materials Authorization RMA number from Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC When requesting support from JTAC by telephone be prepared to provide the following information Your existing case number if you have one Details of the failure or problem Type of activity being performed on the services gateway component when the problem occurred Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands Your name organization name telephone number fax number and shipping address Related Return Procedure for SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 D tati eee men e Locating the SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Component Mini PIM or GPIM Serial Number Label on page 236 e Contacting Customer Support on page 237 Contacting Customer Support Once you have located the serial numbers of the device or component you can return the device or component for repair or replacement For this you need to contact Juniper
204. oe OE PE ae e ae hee 137 Chapter 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM 0 0 00 c eee 139 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM OvervieW 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ee 139 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features 0 0 00 cece eee 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications 14 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIMLEDs 0 0000 cece eee eee eee 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM ComponentS 0 000 ce eee eee eee 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration 00005 145 Using the J Web Interface 6 eee tenes 146 Usine el M narria re cas teeth angry pet gai E pied avers san Anes aoe 147 Chapter 16 Dual CTIZE GPIM 2 cvesiweccsrendt te ded ee eee ee wi a ADE E A 149 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM OVErvieW eect ene eens 149 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key FeatureS 0 cee eens 150 Dual CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications 0 0000 eee 151 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications a an saaa eranen araa 151 DualiGTIVEl GRIM LEDS ra miona ponite eaae i eaa taana eii 152 Dual CTELGPIM COMPONENTS ci seedmore de ou booed dee EREE 153 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration 2 0 eee 153 Using the J Web Interface 6 ee teen eee 154 Using the CLI to Configure the CTI Interface eee 155 Using the CLI to Configure the CEI Interface 2 eee 155 Chapter 17 Quad CETEL GPM eair osc dee oa edd as ee ereperd ecard wi deeb awen a anna E a eae 157 Quad CT VEMGP M liOVeW
205. on the SRX Series Services Gateway are not hot swappable You must power off the device before removing or installing Mini PIMs To install a Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM in the SRX Series Services Gateway 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the grounding point on the back of the device Power off the device by briefly pressing the Power button on the front panel Wait for the Power LED to turn off before proceeding Disconnect the device from its power source e ForSRX210 or SRX220 devices either unplug the power adapter from the AC power outlet or disconnect the power adapter from the power connector on the rear panel of the device e For SRX240 devices either unplug the AC power cord from the AC power outlet or disconnect the AC power cord from the AC power connector on the rear panel of the device Remove the Mini PIM from the electrostatic bag Grasp the screws on each side of the Mini PIM faceplate and align the notches in the connector at the rear of the Mini PIM with the notches in the Mini PIM slot in the device A CAUTION Slide the Mini PIM straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the Mini PIM Slide the Mini PIM in until it lodges firmly in the device See Figure 7 on page 20 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 19 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Fi
206. ons le Key Features on page 53 le Network Interface le Supported Modules on le LEDs on page 54 le Basic Configuration on page 54 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 20 on page 50 gives the physical specifications of the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM Table 20 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM Physical Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 80 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm Weight 2 96 oz 84 g Connector type SFP Form factor Mini PIM Related Documentation l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 53 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 54 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 54 50 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 5 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications Table 21 on page 51 gives the ne
207. ons on page 159 Quad CT1 E GPIM LEDs on page 160 Quad CT1 E GPIM Components on page 161 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc PART 4 Appendixes e SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 167 Contacting Customer Support and Returning SRX Series Services Gateway Hardware Components on page 235 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 165 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 166 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc APPENDIX A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts e l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 167 e l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 171 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 172 l Port G SHDSL Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 187 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 193 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications This topic includes the following sections RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1
208. opyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 9 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 38 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W xL 3 75 in x 5 9 in x 0 80 in 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm x 2 0 cm Weight 4 0 oz 114 g Connector type RJ 11 Form factor Mini PIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 113 F O C through 45 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Related l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 Documentation l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles on page 91 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs The 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has two LEDs Table 39 on page 92 describes the LED states Table 39 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM LED States LED eo e g State Description SYNC Green On Indicates that the VDSL interface is trained Blinking Indic
209. or to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 169 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 170 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 168 Table 70 on page 168 gives RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector crossover pinouts for the l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Table 70 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts RJ 48 Pin on RJ 48 Pin Data T1 E Mini PIM Numbering Form 4 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 5 RX Tip lt gt TX Tip 4 1 TX Ring lt gt RX Ring 5 2 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 70 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinouts continued RJ 48 Pin on RJ 48 Pin Data T1 E Mini PIM Numbering Form 3 3 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground 7 No connect 8 No connect Related gt RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E Documentation Mini Physical Interface Module on page 167 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinouts for the 1 Port T1 E1 Mi
210. ort Local loopback mode support Related l Port GSHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 Documentation e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 e MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 25 on page 62 describes the physical specifications of the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM Table 25 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Physical Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x D 0 8 in x 3 75 in x 5 9 in 2 0 cm x 9 5 cm x 14 5 cm Weight 5 28 oz 150 g Connector type RJ 45 Form factor Mini PIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 104 F O C through 40 C 62 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 6 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Table 25 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM Physical Specifications continued Description Value Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing l Port G SHDSL
211. ort VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module on page 89 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 31 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 32 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 3 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Diagnostics on l Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Specifications on page 35 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica page 38 Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Interface Module Network Interface Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview The l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides a single physical interface to asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL network media types The following 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM cards are available Annex A Annex B Figure 14 on page 34 shows the ADSL2 Annex A Mini PIM front panel Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 33 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branc
212. page 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM has the LEDs listed in Table 58 on page 142 Table 58 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LED States LED eo log State Description STATUS Green On XPIM is online and functioning normally Amber On XPIM is starting up running diagnostics or shutting down Red On XPIM has failed LINK ACT Green On Port is online Off Port is offline Blinking Port is receiving or sending data N A N A N A Not used on the non PoE XPIM NOTE This LEDis not applicable on the non PoE 24 Port XPIM See Figure 37 on page 143 PoE Green On Port is PoE enabled and online NOTE Applic ble n Off Port is offline the PoE XPIM only See Figure 38 on page 143 Blinking Port is PoE enabled and receiving or sending data SFP ports 20 23 Link Green On Port is online NOTE Each port has A two LEDs inthe shape Off Port is offline of a triangle pointing toward the port The Activity Green Blinking Port is receiving or sending data left LED is link and the right is activity Off Port might be on but is not receiving or sending data 142 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Figure 37 24 Port TEN Ethernet XPIM i Sees Talal p et
213. page 29 for hot swappable components and their descriptions Figure 13 GPIM Example with Hot Swappable Components Table 13 Hot Swappable Component Descriptions for GPIMs salle palais STATUS LED The STATUS LED has the following indicator colors e Green and steadily on indicates that the GPIM is functioning normally e Amber and steadily on indicates that the GPIM is starting up running diagnostics or going offline e Red and steadily on indicates that the GPIM has failed e Off indicates that the GPIM is not powered on is offline or is not configured 2 ONLINE OFFLINE Push button to turn the GPIM offline After the STATUS LED button light goes off it is safe to remove the GPIM from the services gateway 3 Label the cables connected to the GPIM so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct GPIM 4 Disconnect the cables from the GPIM 5 If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points D NOTE If you are removing a double high double wide GPIM such as the 24 Port Ethernet XPIM you must reinstall the center GPIM slot bracket 6 Using a Phillips screwdriver loosen the captive screws on each side of the GPIM faceplate Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 29 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 7 Grasp the handles on each side of the GPIM facepla
214. pecifications V 35 cable DCE V 35 cable DTE X 21 cable DCE X21 Cable DUE wicssecssieccctsstanriiecaiasntaresas lt gt IN Syntax CESCFIPTIONS cceesesessesesessesesestseeeseeeseseees xiv in configuration statementS sesererrerrrerrrern XV in Configuration statements XV pipe IN syntax GESCLIPTIONS cc cecesesseseseeseseseeeseeseees XV B bacCkplane vcs cies a tocenrn dl 6 98 149 blank faceplates installing ON services gateway removing from services gateway braces in configuration statements brackets angle in syntax descriptionS e ssersereesrrerrrerren xiv square in configuration statements XV C cables RJ 48 PINOUTS sissien 167 channelized E1 ports RJ 48 cable piNOUtS esessssesesesesrresrrresrressnrssrrnerrrsnress 167 channelized T1 ports RJ 48 Cable piNOUtS esesssseseseiesrrerrresrresnrssrrnenrresnress 167 comments in configuration statements XV components return procedure conventions NOT CE CON S si R xiii text and SyntaX s sesssesersrriesrrrssrrssnrnsnrresrrienrrenrrrerrresrn xiv curly braces in configuration statements XV D damage preventing electrostatic discharge 23 DS3 mode l Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM uses 98 Dual CT1 E GPIM COMPONENTS essare A 153 configuring with J We b ss sessssseresrieerressrrerreerrrereress 154 configuring with the CLI cesses 154 interface specifi
215. r 3 T54 Terminal Timing A T56 V l Pair 4 T22 Receive Timing A T20 W O Pair 3 T54 Terminal Timing B T54 X l Pair 4 T25 Receive Timing B T25 Y Pair 5 123 Send Timing A T23 AA Pair 5 Send Timing B T31 to T30 Protocol Identifier_O T29 to T27 Protocol Identifier_1 T19 to T18 Protocol Mode Related gt EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Documentation Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 228 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 218 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts fo
216. r 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 99 on page 229 gives the X 21 DCE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM NOTE For X 21 protocol even if the cable is not connected to the other end the LED status will show green Table 99 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 DB 15 1 DB 15 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T37 1 Shield Ground T41 2 Pair 1 T39 Receive Data A T42 3 Pair 2 T40 Clear to Send A T16 4 Pair 3 T14 Send Data A T50 5 O Pair 4 T48 Request to Send A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 229 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 99 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output e and VHDCI 68 DB 15 1 1D sho Input Pin Pin Pin 1 Pairing Description T4 6 O Pair 5 T2 Terminal Timing A T51 8 Shield Ground T39 9 l Pair 1 TA Receive Data B T40 10 Pair 2 T42 Clear to Send B T14 1 O Pair 3 T16 Send Data B T48 12 O Pair 4 T50 Request to Send B T2 13 O Pair 5 T4 Terminal Timing B T35 to T33 Protocol Identifier_2 T52 1 Sh
217. r Channel DS3 E3 GPIM COMPOMNEMMG ccccesesescsesessssssescsesseteseesestseseeseeees 103 configuring with the CLI seen 105 hardware SPeCifiCAtiONS ccceeeeeeeeeeees 98 LED Stales ta cathiAneniaclacaaenennee 102 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COMPONENTS Aar ern a 135 configuring With J WeD cesses 136 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Index configuring with the CLI sees 136 fac plat Snein hae et 131 LED States csai keihin 133 OVEVIEWiraisiiie enii eii S 13 specifications 133 with POE esscsssssssseseesessssssseeseesessseesesseseseesessessessees 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COITIDOMG NIES wx cacssscenssissenasgcsdscnepeeastzacncnozecaszcacstecnces 114 configuring With J WeD cesses 116 configuring with Point and Click CLI 116 configuring with the CLI eee 116 hardware SPeCifiCAtiONS ccc 11 WED StAteS sss neret tend O 113 OVE EW neina a 109 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM COMPONEMMNS ccscsssteeseseseseseseceeseseseseseseeeesesesesees 143 configuring with the CLI sees 146 configuring with the J Web cceeee 146 hardware SPeCifiCatiONS c cesses 141 LED STATES senina 142 OVL SIAVA EAV A 139 Witi ROE sessen IR 12 8 Port Serial GPIM COMPONENNS csseeseeseeeees hardware specifications MED SACS aae Dual CT1 E1 GPIM COMPONEM S ierisinde taiii 153 configuring With J WeD u sees 154 configuring With the CLI sees 154 ha
218. r the Quad CT1 E1 GPIM for the CE interface and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI NOTE You must configure the parent CE1 interface before you can configure the child El interface Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 163 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 164 Related Documentation Verify that the Quad CT1 E GPIM is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the FPC status of the interface show chassis fpc Configure the parent CE interface with no partitioning set interfaces cel 1 0 0 no partition interface type el Configure the child El interface and assign an IP address set interfaces el 1 0 0 unit O family inet address ip4 address prefix Assign MTU values to the child El interface set interfaces el 1 0 0 unit O mtu mtu values Configure a security zone for the child E interface and set the configuration for host inbound traffic services and protocols set security zones security zone trust interfaces el 1 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all set security zones security zone trust interfaces el 1 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Quad CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 157 Quad CT1 E GPIM Key Features on page 158 Quad CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E GPIM Hardware Specificati
219. ransceivers for fiber cable connections See Table 47 on page 115 for supported SFP transceivers speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps 10 G in full duplex and half duplex modes Fiber ports support link speeds of 1000 Mbps 10 G in full duplex mode NOTE The1G fiber port configuration is supported starting with Junos OS Release 10 2R2 Copper ports for 10 G use a CAT 6a or CAT 7 cable connector Copper ports support autonegotiation whereas fiber ports do not support autonegotiation NOTE The 10 G fiber port does not support autonegotiation All ports support flow control and can be configured in loopback mode for testing purposes One on each side of the XPIM Use the captive screws to hold the XPIM in place Captive screws You can customize the Ethernet interface type by using different SFP transceivers Table 47 on page 115 shows the available SFP transceivers 14 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 12 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM NOTE We strongly recommend the use of Juniper Networks SFP SFP and XFP transceivers We cannot guarantee correct operation if other transceivers are used The transceiver type can be different in each port as long asa supported part number is used Table 47 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SFP Transceivers Product Number Interface Type Connector SFPP 10GE SR 10GBase SR Ethernet optical LC transceiver SFP 26 m reach SFPP 1IOGE LR 10GB
220. rdware SPecifiCAtiONS ccceceeseeeseeeeeeeeeee 151 LIED States on scciiciciesecetiesssiscvdeasececibeccssdetersioncnicacneees 152 installing on services gateway 25 Quad CTIZE GRIM seesssssssessestestesessesssseeseeseeesseseees COMPONEN Sasan wd enins configuring with J Web configuring with the CLI hardware SPeCifiCatiONS cesses 159 LED St tES siira a aiae etenin 160 interface specification 8 Port Serial GPIM ceesceessesssstessesessesesesseeseseeees 121 interfaces installing reinstalling FEMOVING sasien naa A RA J JTA Ciia ii a 237 243 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center See JTAC JX SFP lOOOBASE T cccccccssssssssssesesessscsessesssesessesnscacetaeees 75 IX SEP IPEHFX vsvssctscsasaveessistavaveiunidvsiaiecsesiacdelavevasetatstaveiaay JX SFP 1GE LH JSX SFP 1GE LX cccscsssssssssseseseseseseneescscscsescseseeeeseseees JSX SFP 1GE SX csescssssssssssesescsessscscscesesecscasacaceesenens JSX SFP 1GE T eeccsssssscsssssscssscsesssessssseesesesesescscseseeseesesees JSX SFP FE FX ce cesesessesesesescsesesesseseseseseseseesecseeseseseesensesrasaress L labels locating on GPIM IGOBDAGCK ERTE E EAE M Mini PIMs blank faceplate reMOVAL sess 18 EMPTY SLO ececscescsessescesssesesssessesssesssesseessessssesseseeeesesenees 18 installieren area ations tees cee 19 PEINSTALLING eeseecescssesesce
221. rial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 225 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 98 on page 226 gives the V 35 DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 98 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM VHDCI 68 M34 1 M34 2 Pin Pin Pin Pairing Description T37 A Shield Ground T51 B Shield Ground T50 C O Request to Send A T42 D Clear to Send A T45 E l Data Mode A T46 F Receive Ready A T49 H O Terminal Ready A T10 KI O Local Loopback T16 P O Pair 1 T14 Send Data A TA R Pair 2 T39 Receive Data A T14
222. rial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 180 e V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 182 V 35DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 184 e X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 185 X 21DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 186 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Table 75 on page 174 gives the EIA 530A DTE cable pinouts Table 75 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 1 3 2 Receive Data A 48 4 47 Request to Send A 37 5 38 Clear to Send A 9 6 Data Set Ready A 174 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 75 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin Pairing Description 57 7 Signal Ground lS 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 6 9 5 Receive Clock B 14 10 13 Received Line Signal Detector B 51 1 52 Terminal Timing B 55 12 56 Transmit Clock B 38 13 37 Clear to Send B 59 14 6
223. ries Services Gateway scicawniawe inen kein O rei eamena tate aauighnaainerne sarin aun 17 Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services GAIEN aciah acd areas st tak ost Ae ee eh Een Emo tea 17 Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Mini Physical Interface Module egora n ont and noe Sande eee eta a ene 17 Removing a Blank Mini Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway 0 ccc eee eee eens 18 Installing a Mini Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services NEW OV pareada paa a 6 0 cian a aeaece canara athe ac Ga ae com aed 19 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc v SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide vi Part 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Removing a Mini Physical Interface Module from the SRX Series Services Gateway acaptar r Seas Re Pade eedereeda esol dad denlekew a 20 Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module in the SRX Series Services Gateway os es cin irst aKew an sews ORO KO weR aaa ha PEE Ea ewes wee 22 Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface MOdUIe 0 eee een nee 22 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to the SRX Series Services GAO WAY eit eeectins earns d acon aot e bee are ribia arena Wane A Gah Mache oa dua E A 23 Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the SRX Series Services Gateway 0 0 cee 24
224. ror Align Error Error Align Error Related Quad CT1 El GPIM Overview on page 157 Documentation Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 uad CT1 E GPIM Key Features on page 158 uad CT1 E 1 GPIM LEDs on page 160 uad CT1 E 1 GPIM Components on page 161 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications Q Q Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 Q Q The Quad CT1 E1 Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM has the specifications listed in Table 66 on page 160 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 159 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 66 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 78 in H x 6 72 in W x 8 1 in L 19 8 mm x 170 8 mm x 205 7 mm Weight 15 4 oz 0 44 kg Connector type RJ 45 Form factor Single high single wide GPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidi ty 5 to 90 noncondensing uad CT1 E1 uad CT1 E1 uad CT1 E1 uad CT1 E1 Q Q Q e Quad CT1 E1 Q Q uad CT1 E1 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs 160 Related Documentation GPIM Overview on page 157 GPIM Key Features on page 158 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 GPIM LEDs on page 160 G
225. rotocols Allow All d Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes To use the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permit All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For more information in the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces and click Help To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI Verify that the 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module is installed on the services gateway show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 47 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 48 Related Documentation Assign the port an IP address set interfaces cm 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces cm 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options set security zones security zone trust interfaces cm 1 0 0 host inboun
226. rt SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 e Supported Modules on page 75 e Key Features on page 76 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 9 l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics l Port T1 E1 e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Port T1 E1 l Port T1 E1 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica e l Port T1 E Mini Physical e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 81 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Interface Module Key Features on page 84 Interface Module LEDs on page 84 nterface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview Related Documentation The l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the physical connection to T1 or E network media types and also performs T1 or El framing and line speed signaling Figure 22 on page 81 shows the 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM front panel l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E Mini Physical l Port T1 E1 amp l Port T1 E1 amp l Port T1 E1 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Mini Physica Mini Phys
227. rt Seri 8 Port Seri Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc a a a a a a a GP GP GP GP GP GP GP M Overview on page 119 M Hardware Specifications on page 120 M Components on page 123 M Key Features on page 122 M LEDs on page 123 M Interface Cables on page 124 M Network Interface Specifications on page 121 129 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 130 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 14 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM This chapter includes the following topics 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 133 e 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 135 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 136 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview The 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is a double high single wide LAN switch Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM that uses two standard slots vertically It is available with or without Power over Ethernet PoE support The PoE GPIMs provide ports that supply electric power over the same ports that are used to connect network devices For more information about PoE see Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12
228. rt Serial GPIM Dir Output O and VHDCI 68 Pin DB 25 1 Pin DB 25 2 Pin Input 1 Description T37 1 Shield Ground T16 2 O Send Data A T4 3 l Receive Data A T50 4 O Request to Send A T42 5 Clear to Send A T45 6 Data Mode A T51 7 Shield Ground T46 8 Receive Ready A T7 15 Send Timing A 220 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 96 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Port Serial GPIM continued Dir Output O and VHDCI 68 Pin DB 25 1 Pin DB 25 2 Pin Input 1 Description T38 17 Receive Timing A T10 18 O Local Loopback T49 20 O Terminal Ready A T4 24 O Terminal Timing A T13 to T12 Protocol Identifier_O TI to T3 Protocol Mode 152 1 Shield Ground T34 2 O Send Data A T59 3 Receive Data A T68 4 O Request to Send A T60 5 Clear to Send A T63 6 Data Mode A T55 Shield Ground T64 8 Receive Ready A T25 l5 Send Timing A T56 17 l Receive Timing A T28 18 O Local Loopback T67 20 O Terminal Ready A T22 24 O Terminal Timing A T31 to T30 Protocol Identifier_O T19 to T18 Protocol Mode Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 221 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related gt EIA 449 DTE Cable Pi
229. rt Serial GPIM Overview The 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM is a network interface card NIC that installs in the front slots of the SRX650 and SRX550 Services Gateways to provide physical connections to a WAN It can be plugged into all the GPIM slots of SRX650 and SRX550 Services Gateways After you install the GPIM in the services gateway you configure a network interface on the GPIM It enhances port density and provides flexible support for universal serial ports including a wide array of interface options such as synchronous support NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs All the ports of the 8 Port Serial GPIM are connected to two dual stacked 136 pin VHDCI connectors Custom cables are used to connect the VHDCI connectors to the data terminal equipment DTE or the data circuit terminating equipment DCE Different cables are required to support different protocols The protocols that a cable supports are identified by the cable ID The cables are labeled with a letter refers to the cable type and four digits unique serial numbers for the cables Figure 29 8 Port Serial GPIM Front Panel T SF SF SN SN SN SN GN SN SN SN ON BN SS SN ON ON BN ON OR O R OR WR OR R WR WR R R W UR R Y 8x SYNC SERIAL Pe BL Pe o FS GPIM Douso 19 Q Q 9 mn 9021285 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc n9 SRX Series Services Gateway
230. s The l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the following key features 2 wire 4 port 2 wire mode 4 wire 2 port 4 wire mode and 8 wire 1 port 8 wire mode support Annex A Annex B Annex F and Annex G support e Virtual circuits per Mini PIM 8 maximum Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM over G SHDSL framing ATMclass of service CoS support Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 61 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide ATM Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM support Dying Gasp support Dying Gasp is the ability of the device to automatically notify the service provider digital subscriber line access multiplexer DSLAM if a power failure occurs The customer premises equipment CPE sends a message to the DSLAM which indicates that a line was lost because of loss in CPE power Wetting current support Wetting current is a small amount of electrical current sent from the central office CO over the copper pair to the CPE to prevent the erosion of the copper wires Some service providers also use wetting current as a method for identifying cable pairs and they therefore need to recognize and receive wetting current Additionally wetting current can be used to power devices such as repeaters and low power devices Noise margin support Point to Point Protocol over ATM and PPPoE over ATM encapsulation supp
231. s Inc Chapter 4 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Related l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 41 Documentation l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 42 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 43 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 43 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 45 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs The Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module l Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has five LEDs Figure 17 on page 45 describes the LEDs available on the l Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Figure 17 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM LEDs ONLINE O ODT LINKO Out OPWR Table 19 on page 45 describes the LED states Table 19 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM LEDs States ED eo lg State Description PWR Green On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has been powered on and completed the power on self test POST Red On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has failed the POST DT Green Blinking The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM scans for a valid downstream DOCSIS channel to lock onto a Downstream downstream channel On The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM has locked onto the DOCSIS downstream channel Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 45 SRX Seri
232. s for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 Documentation 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications Table 48 on page 120 lists the hardware specifications of the 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 48 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications Description Value Dimensions H x W x L 0 756 in x 6 723 in x 8 234 in 1 921 cm x 17 079 cm x 20 916 cm Weight 16 6 oz 0 470 kg Connector type Two dual stacked 136 pin VHDCI connectors Custom cables are used to connect the VHDCI connectors to the data terminal equipment DTE or the data circuit terminating equipment DCE Form factor Single high single wide GPIM Environmental operating temperature 32 F through 1049F O C through 40 C Storage temperature 40 F through 158 F 40 C through 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Altitude Up to 10 000 ft 3 000 m Related 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 Documentation 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122
233. s for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 85 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors Pinout Details continued RJ 45 Pin RJ 11 Pin Number Connections Number Connections Plug Number 7 Tip 3 3 Tip 3 of 4th port P4 8 Ring 3 4 Ring 3 of 4th port Figure 44 on page 190 shows the RJ 45 cable design that connects to four RJ 1 cable connections Figure 44 RJ 45 Cable Design RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors 3 RJ11 1 4 2 a RJ11 4 4 RJ45 5 3 6 RJ11 4 7 8 3 RJ11 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment 190 Table 86 on page 190 shows the pin assignments of the RJ 45 cable that connects to two RJ 11 connectors Table 86 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors Pinout Details RJ 45 Pin RJ 11 Pin Number Number 1 Tip 1 2 Tip 1 of Ist port 2 Ring 1 5 Ring lof Ist port Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 86 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Two RJ 11 Connectors Pinout Details continued RJ 45 Pin RJ 11 Pin Number Number 3 Tip 2 3 Tip 2 of 2nd port 4 Tip O 3 Tip O of Ist port 5 Ring O 4 Ring O of Ist port 6 Ring 2 4 Ring 2 of 2nd port 7 Tip 3 2 Tip 3 of 2nd port 8 Ring 3 5 Ring 3 of 2nd port Figure 45 on page 191 shows the RJ 45 cable design that connects two RJ 11 cable connections Figure 45 RJ 45 Ca
234. s on page 61 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 63 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Modules Basic Configuration on page 64 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Modules Basic Configuration To enable the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM installed on the SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 64 Using the CLI on page 65 Using the J Web Interface 64 To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 In the J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name at 1 0 0 and click Edit To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optiona
235. s security zone trust interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 e 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 132 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 133 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 133 e 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 143 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 137 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 138 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM This chapter includes the following topics 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 143 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview The 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM is a double high double wide LAN switch Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM that uses two standard slots vertically and two standard slots horizontally It is available with or without Pow
236. scrambling e Verilink e Kentrox e Kentrox e Digital Link Digital Link e Larscom e Adtran Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 99 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 41 1 Port Clear Channel DS3 E3 GPIM Network Interface Specifications continued Description Network alarms DS3 Mode Supported in accordance with the ANSI specification e Loss of Signal LOS Out of Frame OOF Loss of Frame LOF e Alarm Identification Signal AIS Remote Defect Identification RDI E3 Mode Supported in accordance with the ITU T specification LOS OOF AIS e RDI e Phase Locked Loop PLL Error counters Incremented during a periodic Incremented during a periodic second polling routine second polling routine e Line Code Violations LCV e Frame Alignment Error FAE e P bit Code Violations PCV e Bipolar Coding Violations BCV e C bit Code Violations CCV e Excessive Zeros EXZ e Line Errored Seconds LES LCV e P bit Errored Seconds PES e LES e C bit Errored Seconds CES e SEFS e Severely Errored Framing e UAS Seconds SEFS e P bit Severely Errored Seconds PSES e C bit Severely Errored Seconds CSES e Unavailable Seconds UAS HDLC Features MTU Default 4474 bytes or maximum Default 4474 bytes or maximum jumbo up to 9192 bytes jumbo up to 9192 bytes Shared flag Supported Supported Idle flag fill
237. security zone trust interfaces el 3 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all set security zones security zone trust interfaces el 3 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Dual CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 149 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Key Features on page 150 Dual CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 151 Dual CT1 E GPIM LEDs on page 152 Dual CT1 E1 GPIM Components on page 153 nstalling a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 17 Quad CT1I E GPIM This chapter includes the following topics e Quad CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 157 Quad CT1 E GPIM Key Features on page 158 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 e Quad CT1 E1 GPIM LEDs on page 160 Quad CT1 E GPIM Components on page 161 Quad CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Overview A Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM is a network interface card NIC that installs in the front slots of the SRX550 or SRX650 Services Gateway to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The GPIM receives incoming packets from a network and transmits outgoing packets to a network The
238. sescssesessesescssestseesesssestseeseatseeseeess 20 removing mode DSS area a A R 101 EoD E AAR A A EE 101 modes DSB EE E TAE E E E 98 ES erase 98 N network interface cards GPM Srina nna 6 98 149 157 MOCE CON Skirna aa xiii Pp parentheses in syntax GeSCIIPTIONS ccc eee XV physical interface modules See GPIMs Physical Interface Modules See GPIMs DINQUUS 220 i a ee ee cr ee 171 RJA O an E E asiees 167 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector ChOSSOVEN riranin aa anara 170 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector CSCRAISIAL oisiscsoseaduccicscsansctendciacadtencteeatves seen a astesaeetactes 169 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector CHOSSOVEN ise scAiantatenited nacraedeaedictwandad 168 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector Straight jesion idiari 168 244 PoE OVEVIE Wa na E a 12 POTTS ans ei ei eee 12 Sp cificali nS ansni niini n 12 ports 001 aico E 03 123 COPD Gli seater ca sree ae nists A 110 Bl E deans 149 150 157 158 Ethe rneta csceccccsessessesesseeseeee 110 114 132 135 140 143 GPIMS uesesscssesessessessssessessessessssessssssnsseesecsesseseeseeseesees 149 157 naming CONVENTIONS cccccccsssssesecsesescsetssecssseseeeeeees 13 NUIMDESS cesssessessessssessessesscsesstssessssnssessesseseeseessssssneseeseenssness 13 POE nio eters 12 132 135 140 143 NS EP IEE EE EE AE TEE OET 110 113 142 T E E E E E A 149 150 157 158 XPIMS esccsesssessesessesseseeseeseesees 109 114 131 135 139 143
239. sical Interface Module Key Features on page 76 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 77 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 78 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules You can customize the Ethernet interface type by using different one port small form factor pluggable SFP modules Table 32 on page 75 shows the supported 1 Port SFP modules Table 32 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modules Product Number Interface Type Connector JX SFP 1GE LX GbE SFP LX transceiver LC JX SFP 1GE SX GbE SFP SX transceiver LC JX SFP 1FE FX OOBASE SX LC OOBASE LX JX SFP 1OOOBASE T JOOOBASE T SFP RJ 45 JX SFP 1FE FX JOOBASE FX LC JX SFP 1GE LH 1OOOBASE LH ZX LC JX SFP 1GE LX OOOBASE LX LC JX SFP 1GE SX 1OOOBASE SX LC JX SFP 1GE T Tri Rate 10 100 1O00BASE T CAT 5e Copper Transceiver SFP GE1OKT13R14 1OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1310 nm RX1490 nm SFP GEIOKT13R15 OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1310 nm RX1550 nm SFP GEIOKT14R13 1OOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1490 nm RX1310 nm SFP GEIOKT15R13 JOOOBASE BX10 at 10 km LC TX1550 nm RX1310 nm SFP GE40KT13R15 JOOOBASE BX at 40 km TX1310 LC nm 7 1550 nm Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 75 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 32 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface
240. sical Interface Module Overview on page 67 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module 180 Table 79 on page 180 gives the RS 422 449 DTE cable pinouts Table 79 RS 422 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM DC 37 LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 37 Pin Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 4 59 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A 1 6 2 Receive Data A Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 79 RS 422 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini PIM continued DC 37 LFH 60 LFH 60 Pin DB 37 Pin Pairing Description 48 7 47 Request to Send A 5 8 6 Receive Timing A 37 9 38 Clear to Send A Al 10 Local Loopback 9 1 10 Data Mode A 33 12 34 Terminal Ready A 13 13 14 Receive Ready A 52 17 ll Terminal Timing A 36 19 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 59 22 60 Send Data B 55 23 56 Send Timing B 2 24 1 Receive Data B 47 25 48 Request to Send B 6 26 5 Receive Timing B 38 27 S Clear to Send B 10 29 9 Data Mode B 34 30 29 Terminal Ready B 14 31 13 Receiver Ready B al 35 52 Terminal Timing B 57 37 Send Common 26 to 25 18 to 17 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 181 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physica
241. ssover Pinouts for the 1 Port TI E1 Mini Physical Interface Module 0 0 cee eee 170 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications 171 RJ 11 Connector Pinouts for the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module i arenieecaa iva mr a a a a a eee r aa 71 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications 172 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Modli eane emas Ee oe alia AoA Ses He Sec eRe tee Bede mA ee 172 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for the l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module care ou weston aaas Eea neice wae ohen eke aww SACARA 174 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Moodlek sana ooh ae oo See hase Ok OE ew Shes So eHeee eH ce ens 176 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Moduler lt a a guchias ss amp shade baa Gh oreo BE Eee ad Oa 177 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Inteniace Module 4 wins eahda eyes acc Arone Set eee Sennsanexe 178 RS 422 449 ElIA 449 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Imtenface Module nas v a2 2 2a 6 0 Sake Coe ae es WE Re Ame seRe ate mease 180 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface IWIGGIUILE Gene ard aes nrg Ao a ede E Pees oe EM ds esos G4 182 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module e reene pa can scene rehash eso
242. st interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services telnet Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options for example Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 5 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols ospf e Set security policies set security policies from zone trust to zone trust Related gt l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 D tati eee l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 50 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 53 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 57 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 58 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 6 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 60 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Int
243. standards e DOCSIS 2 0 e DOCSIS 1 1 e DOCSIS 1 0 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 41 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 42 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 44 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 43 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 45 l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications Table 17 on page 43 provides the network interface properties of the Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Table 17 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Network Interface Properties Specifications Downstream Upstream Modulation 64 or 256 quadrature Quadrature Phase Shift Keying QPSK amplitude modulation and 8 16 32 64 128 QAM QAM Bandwidth 6 MHz US 200 kHz 400 kHz 800 kHz 1 6 MHz 3 2 MHz 6 4 MHz Symbol rate 64 QAM 5 057 Msym s 256 160 320 640 1280 2560 and 5120 QAM 5 361 Msym s ksym s Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 43 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Table 17 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM Network Interface Properties continued Specifications Downstream Upstream Operating level range 15 to
244. stics on page 85 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features The l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the following key features Related Documentation Channel service unit data service unit CSU DSU to eliminate the need for a separate external device 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps operating modes Independent internal and external clocking option Alarm reporting with a 24 hour history maintained Loopback BERT FDL T1 only and Long Buildout T1 only diagnostics Multilink Frame Relay and Multilink PPP support Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules on page 10 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 84 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs The l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has three LEDs Table 36 on page 85 describes the LED states 84 Copyright 2012 Juniper Ne
245. t All c Click OK to save changes and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any For advanced configuration information see the Junos OS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide Using the CLI To perform basic configuration for the 1 Port SFP Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway with the CLI e Verify that the 1 Port SFP Mini PIM is installed on the device show chassis hardware Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address set interfaces ge 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options set security zones security zone trust interfaces ge 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all e Set security policies Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 79 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide 80 Related Documentation set security policies default policy permit all Port SFP Port SFP l Port SFP Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Mini Physical Interface Modu Mini Physical Interface Modu Mini Physical Interface Modu e Overview on page 73 e Hardware Specifications on page 74 Po
246. t Runts Giants FCS Error Abort Error Align Error Error Align Error Interface Module Overview on page 81 e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Interface Module Key Features on page 84 Interface Module LEDs on page 84 nterface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards The l Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM supports the following standards e ANSI TI 107 T1102 GR 499 core GR 253 core Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 83 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation AT amp T Pub 54014 ITU G 751 G 703 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 84 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 84 Port T1 E Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagno
247. t Serial GPIM Interface Cables 124 All the ports of the 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM are connected to two dual stacked 136 pin VHDCI connectors Custom cables are used to connect the VHDCI connectors to the data terminal equipment DTE or the data circuit terminating equipment DCE Different cables are required to support different protocol and the protocols are identified by the cable ID The cables are labeled with a letter refers to the cable type and 4 digits Unique serial numbers for the cables Table 52 on page 125 lists the cables supported by 8 Port Serial GPIMs You can order the cables from Juniper Networks to connect to a port on the synchronous 8 Port Serial Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 13 8 Port Serial GPIM GPIM The device to which you are connecting and the serial interface types determine which type of cable you need Table 52 Juniper Networks Supported Cables Product Number Interface Type Letter Connector Type SRX CBL RS232 DTE 2 RS 232 cable DTE C Male SRX CBL RS232 DCE 2 RS 232 cable DCE D Female SRX CBL V35 DTE 2 v 35 cable DTE E Male SRX CBL V35 DCE 2 V 35 cable DCE IP Female SRX CBL EIA449 DTE 2 EIA 449 cable DTE G Male SRX CBL EIA449 DCE 2 EIA 449 cable DCE H Female SRX CBL EIA530A DTE 2 EIA 530A cable DTE Male SRX CBL EIA530A DCE 2 EIA 530Acable DCE J Female SRX CBL X21 DTE 2 X 21 cable DTE K Ma
248. t service with a single connection option for all service ranges XPIM 10 Gigabit Ethernet GPIM can be installed SRX550 only in the 10 Gigabit GPIM slot 3 or in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slot 6 on the front panel See Figure 25 on page 109 SRX650 only in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slots slots 2 and 6 on the front panel See Figure 26 on page 109 Figure 25 SRX550 Services Gateway Slot Numbers suniper fe ae F L oe ae au lt me 0 7 O O 0000 0 09 0 g034104 lt U SALL torn P Eos g032701 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 109 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM contains two 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces with both copper and small form factor pluggable plus transceiver SFP terminations to support redundancy and enable the services gateway ateway to be used as a pure security service device The 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM also provides effective MPLS GRE termination of customer traffic with reasonable performance D NOTE Only SRX650 Services Gateway supports hot swappable functionality for GPIMs Figure 27 on page 110 shows the 2 Port
249. te and slide the GPIM out of the services gateway 8 Place the GPIM in an electrostatic bag or on an antistatic mat 9 If you are not reinstalling a GPIM into an empty slot install a blank GPIM faceplate over the empty slot to maintain proper airflow If you are reinstalling another GPIM into the empty slot see Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 NOTE Wheninstalling a blank GPIM faceplate make sure that the padded side of the faceplate is facing up Related Removing a Blank Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Faceplate from the Documentation SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Required Tools and Parts for Replacing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 22 30 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc PART 2 Mini Physical Interface Modules Supported on the SRX Series Services Gateway l Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 33 e l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module on page 41 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module on page 49 l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module on page 59 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module on page 67 e l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module on page 73 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module on page 81 e l P
250. ted Module Key Features on page 53 Module LEDs on page 54 Module Basic l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview The 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM provides connectivity to a single Gigabit Ethernet device or to a network The 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM complements the on board 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet interfaces with extended LAN or WAN connectivity It offers support for a variety of transceivers This Mini PIM can be used in copper and optical environments to provide maximum flexibility when upgrading from an existing infrastructure to Metro Ethernet Figure 18 on page 49 shows the Gigabit Ethernet 1 Port SFP Mini PIM front panel Figure 18 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM Front Panel Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 49 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu on page Port G l Port G Specific 1 Port G page 51 1 Port G 1 Port G 50 igabit Ethernet SFP Min igabit Ethernet SFP Min ations on page 51 igabit Ethernet SFP Min igabit Ethernet SFP Min igabit Ethernet SFP Min i Physical Interface Modu i Physical Interface Modu i Physical Interface Modu i Physical Interface Modu i Physical Interface Modu le Hardware Specificati
251. terface Specifications on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 54 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 54 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 53 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs Related Documentation The 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM has two LEDs located to the right of the socket Table 23 on page 54 describes the LED states Table 23 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM LED States ED Color State Description LINK Green On Port is online Off Port is offline ACT Green Blinking Port is receiving or sending data Off Port might be on but is not receiving or sending data l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter on page 50 ace Module Hardware Specifications l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 51 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter page 51 ace Module Supported Modules on l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical I
252. terface Module 0eceee ee eeaee 41 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module OvervieW ss lt sirisrercoressi ses 4l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features 42 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards 43 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface SDECINCALIONS 0242 cae aeuda aa ee REAR ea Eber eA PRG ae eens 43 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications 44 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs 0055 45 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration 46 Using the J Web Interface eee eens 47 Using tAE ICING cht et hte eared diene r bp ae eek ey Bins See 47 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Table of Contents Chapter 5 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module 49 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview 49 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware SPCECINCAHOMS 6x 12 ccoveaea EEA PNE TET TE aE E daackan aon Dase eats 50 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface SPECINCAONS eisereen eet Eaa To Vuni Sot Gedo Gee A oes S D e 51 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported MOGUIES oeeo rero ee a ag e Se oe ees Ene rA Gat ae mon em 5 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key
253. tes of over 150 Mbps downstream Supports four downstream and four upstream channel bonding Supports quality of service QoS Provides interoperability with any DOCSIS compliant cable modem termination system CMTS Supports IPv6 and IPv4 for the modem management interface Supports Advanced Encryption Standard AES Supports baseline privacy encryption BPI Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS Port DOCS page 43 Port DOCS Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica nn nN A Mini Physica S Mini Physica Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu Interface Modu e Overview on page 41 e Supported Standards on page 43 e Hardware Specifications on page 44 e Network Interface Specifications on e LEDs on page 45 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 4 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module l Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 46 1 Port DOCSIS Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards Related Documentation The Data over Cable System Interface Specifications Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM supports DOCSIS 3 0 standards i NOTE Ensure that your cable modem service provider has approved the use of l Port DOCSIS 3 0 Mini PIM in your network The 1 Port DOCSIS Mini PIM provides backward compatibility with the cable modem termination system CMTS based on the following
254. tion Module on page 199 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 194 EIA 530 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 214 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 219 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide EIA 530 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 210 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 206 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 202 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 220 V 35 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 226 V 35 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 222 X 21 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 232 X 21 DCE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on page 229 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module Table 96 on page 220 gives the RS 232 DTE cable pinouts for 8 Port Serial Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM Table 96 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinouts for the 8 Po
255. tions that are not encountered frequently Using the J Web Interface on page 78 Using the CLI on page 79 Using the J Web Interface 78 To perform basic configuration of the 1 Port SFP Mini PIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page displays and lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway along with configuration information if configured 2 To configure properties for a network interface Mini PIM select the interface name and click Edit Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 8 1 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module 3 To use the port on the Mini PIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can also assign the port an IP address for example 192 168 3 1 24 Enter or select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Zones Screens b Add or select a security zone other than Null for example Trust c For host inbound traffic set the following e Services Allow All e Protocols Allow All d Click OK and click Commit to apply the configuration and other pending changes if any 4 Touse the port on the Mini PIM you must also set security policies Select the following settings a Select Configure gt Security gt Policy gt Apply Policy b Set Policy Action Default Policy Action Permi
256. tive humidity 5 to 90 noncondensing Related Documentation Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 35 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 38 l Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications Table 15 on page 35 lists the 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM network interface specifications Table 15 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications Specifications Values Supported operating modes ANNEX A Auto ANSI DMT ANSI T1 413 ITU DMT G 992 1 ITU DMT BIS G 992 3 ADSL2 G 992 5 ANNEX B Auto ITU DMT G 992 1 ITU DMT BIS G 992 3 ADSL2 G 992 5 ITU ANNEXB UR2 ANNEX M ITU DMT BIS G 992 3 ADSL2 G 992 5 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 35 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 15 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications continued Specifications Values
257. ts Verify that the l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM is installed on the device show chassis hardware user host gt show chassis hardware The following is a sample output of the command SRX240 output shown other devices similar Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis AG1111AA7925 SRX240h Routing Engine REV 01 750 021793 PW7925 RE SRX240H da0 999 MB ST72682 Nand Flash usbO addr 1 DWC OTG root hub 0 vendor 0x0000 uhubO usbO addr 2 product 0x6254 25172 vendor 0x058f uhub1 usbO addr 3 ST72682 High Speed Mode 64218 STMicroelectronics umassO FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 16x GE Base PIC FPC 1 750 029145 112009000278 FPC PIC 0 1x GE SFP mPIM FPC 2 REV 00 750 032730 AABC5081 FPC PIC 0 1x GE High Perf SFP mPIM Xcvr 0 REV 02 740 013111 9101465 SFP T FPC 3 750 029145 062009000057 FPC PIC 0 1x GE SFP mPIM FPC 4 750 029145 122009000061 FPC PIC 0 1x GE SFP mPIM Xcvr 0 REV 01 740 011782 PBLOC3T SFP SX Power Supply 0 NOTE Inthe example shown above the output for the 1 Port SFP Mini PIM appears as 1X GE SFP mPIM and the output for the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM appears as 1X GE High Perf SFP mPIM Verify the status of the interface show interfaces terse Assign the port an IP address for example set interfaces ge 1 0 0 unit O family inet address interface address destination prefix Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone tru
258. twork interface specifications of the 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet Small Form Factor Pluggable Mini Physical Interface Module SFP Mini PIM Table 21 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM Network Interface Specifications Specification 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini PIM Operating modes Full duplex and half duplex Operating speed 10 100 1000 Mbps VLAN support 802 19 virtual LANs Class of service support Supported Encapsulations DIX LLC SNAP CCC TCC and VLAN CCC Loopback diagnostic feature Supported Autonegotiation Supported Related l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 49 Documentation l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 50 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 53 E e l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Inter page 51 ace Module Supported Modules on l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 54 l Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 54 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Modules You can customize the Ethernet interface type by using different one port small form factor pluggable SFP modules Table 22 on page 52 shows the supported 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet SFP modules Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 51 SR
259. tworks Inc Chapter 10 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Profiles A profile is a table that contains a list of preconfigured VDSL2 settings Table 37 on page 91 lists the different profiles supported on the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini PIM along with their data rates Table 37 Supported Profiles on the 1 Port VDSL2 Mini PIM Profiles Data Rate 8a 50 8b 50 8c 50 8d 50 12a 68 12b 68 17a 100 Auto Auto mode default Related l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 89 Documentation l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 90 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 92 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 91 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Cable Specifications on page 192 l Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 93 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications Table 38 on page 92 gives the hardware specifications of the 1 Port VDSL2 Annex A Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM C
260. tworks Inc Related Documentation Chapter 9 1 Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Table 36 1 Port T1 E1 Mini PIM LED States LED Color State Description ALARM Yellow On Indicates that there is a local or remote alarm device has detected a failure Off Indicates that there are no alarms or failures LOOPBACK Yellow On Indicates that a loopback or line state is detected Off Indicates that the loopback is not active CD Carrier Green On Indicates that the Mini PIM link is up Detector Off Indicates that carrier detect is not active l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 81 e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 82 e l Port T1 E Mini Physical e l Port T1 E1 e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Mini Physica e l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical l Port T1 E1 Mini Physica Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 82 Interface Module Supported Standards on page 83 Interface Module Key Features on page 84 nterface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on page 85 Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 86 l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics The l Port T1 E1 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has the following loopback diagnostics Local remote payload e Test patterns BERT All ones All zeros Alternating ones and zeros AA 55 1 3 or
261. uniper SRX210 SRX240 CPE RJ 45 cable split Patch Panel DSLAM with G SHDSL into two RJ 11 8 wire line cards connectors with 4 wire support Figure 42 on page 189 shows the topology for G SHDSL8 Wire Mini PIM operating in 4X2 wire mode Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Appendix A SRX Series Services Gateways Interface Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Figure 42 G SHDSL Mini PIM Operating in 4X2 Wire Mode VPI VCI 8 80 SRX210 SRX240 CPE RJ 45 cable split into Patch Panel DSLAM with G SHDSL four RJ 11 connectors 8 wire line cards with 2 wire support Figure 43 on page 189 shows the topology for G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini PIM operating in 1X8 wire mode Figure 43 G SHDSL Mini PIM Operating in 1X8 Wire Mode VPINVCI 8 80 SRX210 SRX240 CPE G SHDSL Mini PIM Patch Panel DSLAM with G SHDSL with RJ 45 connector 8 wire line cards RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors Pin Assignment Table 85 on page 189 shows the pin assignments of the RJ 45 cable RJ 45 to four RJ 11 Table 85 RJ 45 Cable RJ 45 to Four RJ 11 Connectors Pinout Details RJ 45 Pin RJ 11 Pin Number Connections Number Connections Plug Number 1 Tip 1 3 Tip 1 of Ist port Pl 2 Ring 1 4 Ring 1 of 2nd port 3 Tip 2 3 Tip 20f 3rdport P2 4 Tip O 3 Tip O of Ist port 5 Ring O 4 Ring O of Ist port P3 6 Ring 2 4 Ring 2 of 3rd port Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 189 SRX Series Services Gateway
262. uniper Networks Inc Table of Contents About This Guide ji3 sac ce dco cewnet oak ods Meets See eee ddedasseGenaws xiii ODECE Sedana 2tohe ner hents Metals rae seat ewes aa AONA en xiii Audien i acres trsne odes aE aes Wie ESR E ES E Seuss E S E xiii Documentation GConventiONSs cs cerestcerri terr eee eee ees xiii SRX Series Documentation and Release NoteS 0 0 00 cee XV Obtaining Documentation 0 0 eee eee eens XV Documentation Feedback 0 0 ee eee eens xvi Requesting Technical Support 0 0 eee eens xvi Part 1 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface Overview Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces 3 SRX Series Services Gateway Interface OvervieW 0 eee 3 SRX Series Services Gateway Mini Physical Interface Modules Overview 4 SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules OVES e gonis 92 6 arr EEEE EE E a E E E E dod be eaareuee ne Gace 5 Supported SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces 0 6 eee 7 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Models and Compatibility 8 MTU Default and Maximum Values for Physical Interface Modules 10 SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Power and Heat Requirements 1l Power over Ethernet Support on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces 12 SRX Series Services Gateways Interfaces Port Naming Conventions 13 Chapter 2 Installing and Removing Interfaces on the SRX Se
263. upport on SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces on page 12 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration To enable the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM installed on your SRX Series Services Gateway you must configure its properties You can perform the same configuration Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 145 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide tasks using either the J Web interface or the CLI In addition you can configure a wide variety of options that are not encountered frequently D NOTE When installing the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM which uses four slots you must install it in the 20 Gigabit GPIM slots 2 and 6 which refer to the bottom four slots 1 to 4 or the top four slots 5 to 8 Using the J Web Interface on page 146 Using the CLI on page 147 Using the J Web Interface To perform basic configuration for the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM and to configure network interfaces for the services gateway using the J Web interface 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configure gt Interfaces gt Ports The Interfaces page lists the network interfaces present on the services gateway Verify whether the interface has been configured by reviewing the information in the Configured column yes no 2 Select the name of the interface you want to edit 3 To use the port on the XPIM you must assign it to a security zone other than the Null zone Optionally you can als
264. upported in part by the National Science Foundation Portions of the GateD software copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of the GateD software copyright 1991 D L S Associates This product includes software developed by Maker Communications Inc copyright 1996 1997 Maker Communications Inc Juniper Networks Junos Steel Belted Radius NetScreen and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries The Juniper Networks Logo the Junos logo and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc All other rademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify ransfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks U S Patent Nos 5 473 599 5 905 725 5 909 440 6 192 051 6 333 650 6 359 479 6 406 312 6 429 706 6 459 579 6 493 347 6 538 518 6 538 899 6 552 918 6 567 902 6 578 186 and 6 590 785 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved Re
265. urity zones security zone trust interfaces xe 6 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Set operating mode for example copper set interfaces xe 6 0 0 media type copper NOTE By default interfaces run in fiber mode at 10 G speed with autonegotiation Set interface speed for example 10 G set interfaces xe 6 0 0 speed 10g O NOTE For copper ports all 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1 G and 10 G speeds are supported for fiber ports only 1G and 10 G speeds are supported 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 110 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services Gateway on page 24 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 13 8 Port Serial GP IM 8 Port Serial GPIM Overview on page 119 e 8 Port Serial GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 120 8 Port Serial GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 121 8 Port Serial GPIM Key Features on page 122 8 Port Serial GPIM LEDs on page 123 e 8 Port Serial GPIM Components on page 123 8 Port Serial GPIM Interface Cables on page 124 8 Port Serial GPIM Basic Configuration on page 126 8 Po
266. vision History May 2012 The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page SOFTWARE LICENSE The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase order or to the extent applicable to any reseller agreement or end user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks By using this software you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions Generally speaking the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions against certain uses The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated You should consult the license for further details For complete product documentation please see the Juniper Networks Web site at www juniper net techpubs END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of or is intended for use with Juniper Networks software Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement EULA posted at ii Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc http www juniper net support eula html By downloading installing or using such software you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc iii Copyright 2012 J
267. way to act as power sourcing equipment to supply the power to the GPIMs connected on the designated PoE ports Table 9 on page 13 lists the SRX550 and SRX650 Services Gateway PoE specifications Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 1 Introduction to the SRX Series Services Gateway Interfaces Table 9 SRX550 and SRX650 Services Gateway PoE Specifications Power Management Schemes Values Supported standards e IEEE 802 3 af e IEEE 802 3 at e Legacy Supported slots PoE is supported on the following front panel slots e SRX550 Services Gateway Slots 3 4 6 8 e SRX650 Services Gateway Slots 2 4 6 8 Total PoE power sourcing The 645 W AC and 645 W DC power supplies support the capacity following capacities e 255 W with PoE ona single power supply or with redundancy using the two power supply option e 510 W with PoE using the two power supply option operating as nonredundant Per port power limit 31 2 W Power management modes e Static Power allocation for each interface can be configured e Class Power for interfaces is allocated based on the class of the powered device connected Related SRX Series Services Gateway Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Modules Overview Documentation on page 5 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 131 e 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 Installing a Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module on the SRX Series Services
268. win AX 7m Anti counterfeit capabilities Quad speed support for copper mode 10OGBase T IEEE 820 3an OOOBase T IEEE 802 3ab 1 OOBase T IEEE 802 3u and 10Base T IEEE 802 3 Standard quality of service QoS features User configuration of fiber and copper ports e When the interface is configured as a copper port typical Ethernet configuration such as autonegotiation is supported Forced rate and link mode are allowed Four forced and autonegotiation rates are provided 10 G and 1G Autonegotiation is required to establish link when rates are 1G and 10 G Copper ports support autonegotiation whereas fiber ports do not support autonegotiation NOTE The 1G fiber port configuration is supported starting with Junos OS Release 10 2R2 The 10 G fiber port does not support autonegotiation e When the interface is configured as a fiber port typical configurations similar to the 1 Gbps fiber SFP ports in the 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM are supported See 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 for more details Diagnostics for debugging and problem isolation Operates in routed mode SNMP support J Web support 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 109 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 111 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 113 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Components on page 114 2 Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 115 2
269. with a 24 hour history maintained Loopback local and remote and BERT PRBS diagnostics e Multilink Frame Relay and Multilink PPP support MTU size of 9000 bytes maximum e Quad CT1 E GPIM Overview on page 157 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Network Interface Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Hardware Specifications on page 159 Quad CT1 E GPIM LEDs on page 160 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Components on page 161 e Quad CT1 E GPIM Basic Configuration on page 161 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications Chapter 17 Quad CT1 E GPIM The Quad CT1 E Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module GPIM provides the network interface specifications specific to T1 or E1 modes listed in Table 65 on page 159 Table 65 Quad CT1 E1 GPIM Network Interface Specifications Description Tl Mode Network Interface Specifications Line encoding AMI B8ZS E1 Mode HDB3 Mode Framed clear channel e Framed clear channel 64 Kbps e Unframed clear channel Fractional framing HDLC Features Nx 64 Kbps or N x 56 Kbps nonchannelized data rates e Superframe D4 SF Extended Superframe ESF T1 N 1 to 24 e G 04 e G704 with no CRC4 e G 03 Unframed E1 N 1 to 31 CRC 16 32 16 32 Shared flag Supported Supported Idle flag fill Supported Supported Counters Runts Giants FCS Error Abort Runts Giants FCS Error Abort Er
270. work Interface Specifications on Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module LEDs on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 39 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs The 1 Port ADSL2 Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM has two LEDs Table 16 on page 38 describes the LED states Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc 37 SRX Series Services Gateways for the Branch Physical Interface Modules Hardware Guide Related Documentation Table 16 1 Port ADSL2 Mini PIM LED States 1B SYNC Color Green On State Description Indicates that the ADSL interface is trained Blinking Indicates training is in progress Off Indicates that the interface is idle TX RX Green Blinking Indicates that traffic is passing through Off Indicates that no traffic is passing through Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 35 Port ADSL2 Port ADSL2 l Port ADSL2 page 38 Port ADSL2 Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Mini Physica Interface Module Overview on page 33 Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 34 Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on Interface Module Supported Standards on page 36 Interface Module Key Features on page 37 Interface Module Supported Loopback Diagnostics on
271. x Add or select a security zone for example Trust set security zones security zone trust interfaces se 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic system services all Add or select security zones for host inbound traffic protocol options set security zones security zone trust interfaces se 1 0 0 0 host inbound traffic protocols all Set security policies set security policies default policy permit all Port Seria Port Seria Port Seria Port Seria Port Seria n n n Z EzE EZ E i Physi i Physi i Physi i Physi i Physi cal cal cal cal cal nter E nter E nter nter E nter ace ace ace ace ace Modu Modu Modu Modu le Overview on page 67 le Hardware Specifications on page 68 Module Supported Standards on page 68 le Key Features on page 69 le LEDs on page 69 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc CHAPTER 8 l Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module This chapter includes the following topics Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu e Overview on page 73 e Hardware Specifications on page 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Module Network Interface Specifications on page 74 Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu Port SFP Mini Physical Interface Modu e Supported Modules on
272. ype 60 pin Synchronous Serial female Form factor Mini PIM e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards on page 68 nterface Module Key Features on page 69 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 69 M M e l Port Serial Mini Physica M M e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards 68 Related Documentation The 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM supports the following standards e TIA EIA 530 e V 35 X21 e RS 232 e RS 449 e l Port Seria f ini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 67 E l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 68 e l Port Seria f ini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 69 e l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 69 E lt lt lt l Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Basic Configuration on page 70 Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 7 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features The 1 Port Serial Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM provides the following key features Autoselection of operational modes based on DTE or DCE cables Loca
273. ype can be different in each port as long as a supported part number is used Copyright 2012 Juniper Networks Inc Chapter 15 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Table 60 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM SFP Transceivers Product Number Interface Type eola lalelei olg JX SFP FE FX 100Base FX Fast Ethernet optical LC transceiver SFP JX SFP 1GE LH 1000Base LH Gigabit Ethernet Ee optical transceiver SFP 80 Km reach JX SFP 1GE LX 1000Base LX Gigabit Ethernet LC optical transceiver SFP JX SFP 1GE SX 1000Base SX Gigabit Ethernet Lic optical transceiver SFP 550 m reach without DDM Difference in the Depth of Modulation JX SFP 1GE T 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 copper transceiver SFP SRX SFP 1GE LH 1000Base LH Gigabit Ethernet LC optical transceiver SFP SRX SFP 1GE LX 1000Base LX Gigabit Ethernet LC optical transceiver SFP SRX SFP 1GE SX 1000Base SX Gigabit Ethernet Le optical transceiver SFP SRX SFP 1GE T 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet Cat 5 cable optical transceiver SFP SRX SFP FE FX 100Base FX Fast Ethernet optical ke transceiver SFP Related 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Overview on page 139 Documentation 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Key Features on page 140 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Hardware Specifications on page 141 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM LEDs on page 142 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet XPIM Basic Configuration on page 145 Power over Ethernet S
274. ysical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 e l Port G SSHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Supported Standards Related Documentation The 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM complies with the following standards ITU T G 991 2 Symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL transceiver ITU T G 994 1 Handshake procedures for digital subscriber line DSL transceivers 3 LC Comment ITU T G 997 1 Physical layer management for DSL transceivers e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Overview on page 59 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes on page 60 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Key Features on page 61 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Hardware Specifications on page 62 e l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module LEDs on page 63 1 Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Operating Modes 60 The l Port G SHDSL 8 Wire Mini Physical Interface Module Mini PIM can be configured to operate in the following modes 4X2 wire 4 port 2 wire e 2X4 wire 2 port 4 wire 1X8 wire l port 8 w

Juniper 1-Port Serial Mini-PIM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents